JP6464655B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, for a pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is performed based on a game ball entering a ball-entry unit provided in a game area, and a variation display of a pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device. In the case where a winning result is obtained, a combination of a specific pattern or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and a configuration for shifting to a special gaming state advantageous to the player is known. When the game state is shifted to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entering device provided in the game area is started, and a game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-261415 A

  Here, in a gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to suitably produce an effect in order to increase the degree of attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing an effect.

In order to solve the above problem, the invention according to claim 1 is an information deriving unit capable of deriving state information of a monitoring range existing ahead of the gaming machine based on a reception result in the receiving unit;
Reference setting means for storing the state information derived by the information deriving means as reference information in the reference information storage means in a reference information acquisition period that becomes a reference when specifying the player's viewing range;
A viewing range identifying unit that identifies the viewing range that the player is viewing using the reference information stored in the reference information storage unit and the state information derived by the information deriving unit;
An effect setting unit that causes the result of specifying the visual range by the visual range specifying unit to affect the content of an effect that is subsequently executed.
Equipped with a,
The acquisition period of the reference information occurs in a situation where a predetermined effect is being executed on a predetermined display means,
When the reference information is stored in the reference information storage means in a predetermined period during which the player's attention can be higher than the subsequent period in the execution period of the predetermined effect, the reference setting means If the reference information is not newly acquired after the predetermined period has elapsed and the reference information is not stored in the reference information storage means during the predetermined period, When the state information corresponding to the reference is derived by the information deriving unit after the elapse of the predetermined period, the state information is stored in the reference information storage unit as the reference information .

  According to the present invention, it is possible to perform an effect suitably.

It is a front view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a game history display unit. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command response process in sound light side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a data table. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure for performing the imaging control of the board | substrate for imaging, and the various control using an imaging result. It is a flowchart which shows the imaging control process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the signal processing in a signal processing circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a message notice. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a normal reach production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the apologetic reach production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a hit type reach production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the reach production of an intense heat system. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating normal game state alerting | reporting. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the game state alerting | reporting in advance. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the game state alert | report of a promotion. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the feature of the attention type set at the time of a game start. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the type table of a normal type, (b)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st outreach reach lottery table in a normal type, (d) Normal type It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the game state alerting | reporting table in a 1st jackpot reach lottery table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data table corresponding to the notice, the content of reach, the content of game state alerting | reporting, a stop result, and display continuation time. It is a time chart for demonstrating that variation time is constant. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the method to specify the direction of a gaze, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the direction of a player's gaze before seating, (c) The player after seating It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the direction of the eyes | visual_axis. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the target object which the player is looking at. It is a flowchart which shows the pre-seating determination process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the type determination process before seating in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the type setting process before seating in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the post-seating determination process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the face memory | storage process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the type determination process after seating in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the type setting process after seating in sound-light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the type setting process at the time of start in sound light side MPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of operation | movement of a movable object unit. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of operation | movement of a movable accessory. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notice content with a low jackpot expectation degree, (b), (c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notice content with a high jackpot expectation degree. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating that the generation | occurrence | production frequency of a liquid crystal effect differs for every attention type set after a prescription | regulation speed, (b) It is possible for every attention type set after a prescription rotation speed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating that the generation frequency of the production | presentation using an animal unit and a movable accessory is different. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the type table of liquid crystal concentration type, (b)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st detachment | reach reach lottery table in liquid crystal concentration type, (d) Liquid crystal It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the gaming state alerting | reporting table in the concentration type 1st jackpot reach lottery table. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating direction of a player's eyes | visual_axis in a game, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the target object which the player is looking at during a game. It is a flowchart which shows the attention point determination process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the point of interest type determination process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the point of interest type setting process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the face authentication process in sound light side MPU. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in main side MPU in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the viewpoint position specific process in main side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a viewpoint position specific mark. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating that the generation frequency of a liquid crystal effect differs for every attention type set after the prescription | regulation rotation speed in 2nd Embodiment, (b) In 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating that the generation frequency of the production | presentation using a movable object unit and a movable accessory is different for every attention type set after regulation rotation speed. It is a flowchart which shows the point of interest type determination process performed in main side MPU in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the attention event specific process in main side MPU. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure regarding a communication means. It is a flowchart which shows the production request process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation command response process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command corresponding | compatible process performed in the sound light side MPU in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the reach | attainment effect of the intense heat system in 4th Embodiment. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an initial normal type table, (b) demonstrates that the distribution of the numerical range of the reach effect counter in an initial normal type table and a balance type normal type table is different. It is explanatory drawing for. It is a flowchart which shows the player determination process performed in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the reference | standard face data specific process performed in sound light side MPU. It is a time chart which shows a mode that a type table is set in the case where the player's face data used as a reference | standard in the intense heat type reach | attainment generation period is acquired, and the case where it is not so.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine 10”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing an unfolded main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility S.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a ball lending device (for example, CR unit) Y is provided on the side of the outer frame 11. On the front side of the ball lending apparatus Y, a bill inlet H1 and a medium outlet H2 are provided. By inserting a bill into the bill entrance H1, it is possible to receive a number of game balls corresponding to the bill. Further, by inserting a card-type storage medium into the medium entrance / exit H2, it is possible to receive a number of gaming balls corresponding to the information stored in the storage medium. In addition, what is inserted in the ball lending apparatus Y when receiving the lending of the game ball is not limited to the card, and may be a coin in which cash information is stored. In addition, when the return operation is performed in a situation where information on the number of usable game balls remains, the storage medium is returned through the medium entrance H2. By inserting the storage medium into the medium entrance / exit H2 of the ball lending device Y provided in the pachinko machine 10 or another pachinko machine 10, the number of game balls corresponding to the information stored in the storage medium is lent out. It becomes possible.

  2 and 3, the gaming machine main body 12 includes a main body frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the main body frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the main body frame 13. And. A main body frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the main body frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation front end side in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the main body frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the backpack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the main body frame 13, and when viewed from the front, the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side. It is possible to move.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. The door frame 14 has a function of locking the door frame 14 to the main body frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the front door frame 14 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the main body frame 13. A window portion 21 is formed on the front door frame 14 so that substantially the entire game area PA described later can be viewed from the front. The window portion 21 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a transparent window panel 22 is fitted therein. The window panel 22 is unitized in a state in which two colorless and transparent glasses are opposed to each other in the front-rear direction. Note that a colorless and transparent synthetic resin plate may be used as the window panel 22 in place of the colorless and transparent glass.

  A display light emitting unit 23 is provided above the window 21 in the front door frame 14. The display light-emitting unit 23 incorporates a light-emitting body such as an LED, and is turned on or blinking according to the contents of the effect at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and responds to the occurrence of an abnormality at a predetermined abnormality Lighting or blinking is performed in the manner described above. Further, a pair of left and right speaker portions 24 are provided on the left and right corner sides in the upper region of the front door frame 14. The speaker unit 24 outputs a sound or a sound corresponding to the contents of the effect at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and outputs a sound or a sound corresponding to the occurrence of an abnormality when a predetermined abnormality occurs.

  Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32 that bulge to the near side are provided side by side. An upper pan 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower pan 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32. The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from the payout device 106 described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 45 described later while aligning them in a line. The lower tray 34 has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 33.

  The upper bulging portion 31 is provided with a ball lending operation device 26. The ball lending operation device 26 is provided with a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a frequency display unit 29. Information on the number of game balls that can be used for lending, returning, and using the ball lending operation device 26 in a situation where information on game balls that can be used based on the insertion of bills or storage media into the ball lending device Y is stored. The frequency corresponding to can be confirmed. That is, the ball lending button 27 is operated to obtain a lending ball, and the lending ball is paid out as long as there is information on the number of usable game balls. The return button 28 is operated when requesting the return of a storage medium storing information corresponding to the number of usable game balls. The frequency display unit 29 displays a frequency that is information corresponding to the number of available game balls.

  The lower bulging portion 32 has a discharge operation portion 35 that is operated to discharge game balls stored in the lower tray 34 to a ball receiving box (not shown) disposed below the lower bulging portion 32. Is provided. The discharge operation unit 35 is provided so as to be able to open and close a ball hole formed in the bottom of the lower plate 34. In the situation where the discharge operation part 35 is disposed at the closed position, the ball punching hole is in a closed state, the discharge of the game ball from the lower plate 34 is prevented, and in the situation where the discharge operation part 35 is disposed at the open position, The hole is opened, and the game ball is allowed to be discharged from the lower tray 34. An electric actuator is not provided for the discharge operation unit 35, and it is necessary to manually operate the discharge operation unit 35 in order to move the discharge operation unit 35 between the closed position and the open position. Moreover, although the discharge operation part 35 is urged | biased toward the closed position, the discharge operation part 35 is made into an open position by utilizing the engagement relationship between the discharge operation part 35 and the lower side bulging part 32. It is the structure which can be made to hold | maintain. When the holding state is released, the discharge operation unit 35 is returned to the closed position.

  A firing operation device 37 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to protrude to the near side. By operating the launch operation device 37, a later-described game ball launch mechanism 45 is driven and controlled, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 33 are launched. The firing operation device 37 includes an operation base 37a provided to project forward, and an operation handle 37b provided to be rotatably supported by the operation base 37a. The operation handle 37b is operated to rotate. As a result, the launch intensity of the game ball from the game ball launching mechanism 45 is adjusted. The launch operation device 37 includes a touch sensor 37c for detecting that the operation handle 37b is touched by the player, a variable resistor 37d for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 37b, A stop switch 37e is provided that is operated to stop the launch of the game ball even when the operation handle 37b is being operated by the player. In the situation where the operation handle 37b is disposed at the initial position, the stop switch 37e is automatically turned on by the operation handle 37b. When the touch sensor 37c detects that the operation handle 37b is touched and the stop switch 37e is not turned on, it is detected through the variable resistor 37d. A game ball is launched with a launch intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation operation being performed.

  On the left side of the lower bulge portion 32, there is provided an effect button 40 that is pressed by the player when the symbol display or effect display on the symbol display device 61 is performed. Since the position where the performance button 40 is provided is on the opposite side of the operation handle 37b with the lower plate 34 in between, the player can operate the operation handle 37b with the right hand and force the operation button 40 with the left hand. A pressing operation can be performed.

  Next, the main body frame 13 will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the main body frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 41 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 43 is formed at the center of the resin base 41. A game board 51 is detachably attached to the resin base 41. The game board 51 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 51 is exposed to the front side of the main body frame 13 through the window hole 43 of the resin base 41.

  The structure of the game board 51 is demonstrated based on FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 51.

  An inner rail portion 51a and an outer rail portion 51b are attached to the game board 51 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail portion 51a and the outer rail portion 51b guide means. As a guide rail, it is configured. A game ball launched from a game ball launching mechanism 45 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 43 in the resin base 41 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

  The game ball launching mechanism 45 includes a launch rail 46 that extends toward the guide rail, a ball feeder 47 that feeds the game balls stored in the upper plate 33 onto the launch rail 46, and a feed on the launch rail 46. And a solenoid 48 that is an electric actuator for firing a game ball toward the guide rail. When the shooting operation device 37 provided on the front door frame 14 is turned, the ball feeding device 47 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is supplied onto the shooting rail 46 and the solenoid 48 is driven and controlled. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PA.

  The game board 51 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 52, a special electricity winning device 53, a first operating opening 54, a second operating opening 55, a through gate 56, a symbol display unit 60, a special drawing unit 62, a universal drawing unit 63, and the like. ing.

  Even if a ball enters the through gate 56, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters any of the general winning port 52, the special electricity winning device 53, the first operating port 54, and the second operating port 55, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, with respect to the number of winning balls, when 10 balls are paid out to the general winning opening 52, 10 winning balls are paid out, and 15 when the winning into the special winning device 53 occurs. When a prize ball is paid out and a ball enters the first operation port 54, three prize balls are paid out and a ball enters the second operation port 55. The payout of one prize ball is executed.

  Note that the number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, although the number of prize balls in the second operation port 55 is smaller than that in the first operation port 54, the specific number of prize balls may be different from the above. The second working port 55 may be configured to have a larger number of prize balls than the first working port 54.

  In addition, an out port 58 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 51, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 58. The game board 51 is provided with a large number of nails 59 in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate, and various members such as a windmill are provided.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode of discharging from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 58, the general winning port 52, the special prize winning device 53, the first operating port 54, the second operating port 55, and the through gate 56 are used. Entering a game ball into is also expressed as a prize.

  The first operating port 54 and the second operating port 55 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 51. Both the first working port 54 and the second working port 55 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 54 and 55 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operation port 54 is located upward. The second operating port 55 is provided with a general electric utility 55a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the utility wire 55a, the game ball cannot win the second operating port 55, and the winning of the second operating port 55 becomes possible when the electric utility item 55a is opened.

  A through gate 56 is provided on the upstream side of the second operating port 55 in the flow direction of the game ball. The through gate 56 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball that has won the through gate 56 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 56 can win the second operating port 55.

  Based on the winning of the through gate 56, the universal power 55 a of the second operating port 55 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed with a winning at the through gate 56 as a trigger, and a normal display of the general-purpose unit 63 provided in the lower right corner of the game area PA where the game ball does not pass. The display 63 fluctuates and displays the pattern. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electrification opening winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the fluctuation display of the general map display unit 63a is terminated, the state shifts to the public power open state. In the public power open state, the general electric utility 55a is opened in a predetermined manner.

  In addition, the general map display unit 63a is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , Or other types of display devices such as CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern variably displayed on the general map display unit 63a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

  In the universal map unit 63, a universal map display 63b is provided at a position adjacent to the universal map display 63a. A maximum of four game balls won in the through gate 56 are reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the general-purpose hold display portion 63b.

  A lottery is performed with the winning of the first working port 54 or the second working port 55 as a trigger. The lottery result is clearly shown through display effects in the symbol display device 61 of the special symbol unit 62 and the symbol display unit 60.

  Specifically, the special figure unit 62 is provided with a special figure display section 62a. The display area of the special figure display unit 62 a is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 61. In the special figure display unit 62a, a winning lottery is performed using a winning at the first operating port 54 or a winning at the second operating port 55 as a trigger, and thereby a change display or a predetermined display of the pattern is performed. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. The special figure display unit 62a is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , Or other types of display devices such as CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern displayed on the special figure display unit 62a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors A configuration in which is displayed is conceivable.

  In the special figure unit 62, a special figure holding display part 62b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display part 62a. The number of game balls won in the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the special figure reservation display section 62b.

  In detail, the symbol display device 61 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device 96 described later. The symbol display device 61 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display. May be.

  In the symbol display device 61, when the special symbol display unit 62a performs a variation display or a predetermined display on the basis of winning in the first operating port 54 or winning in the second operating port 55, the symbol is displayed accordingly. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. In addition, in the symbol display device 61, not only a display effect triggered by winning a prize at the first operating port 54 or the second operating port 55, but also a display effect during the opening / closing execution mode described later that shifts after winning the winning combination. Is done.

  The display contents when the symbol display is performed by the symbol display device 61 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a diagram individually showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 61, and FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a display surface of the symbol display device 61.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 (a) to (j), a design which is a kind of design is composed of nine main designs with numbers "1" to "9", respectively, and a shell-shaped design. It consists of sub-designs. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, on the display surface of the symbol display device 61, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine kinds of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. Then, on the display surface of the symbol display device 61, the symbols of these symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, on the display surface of the symbol display device 61, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are displayed. The stop is displayed. Further, on the display surface of the symbol display device 61, as shown in FIG. 6A, there are five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right descending line L4, and a right ascending line L5. Is set.

  When symbols are displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 61 on the basis of winning in the first operating port 54 or the second operating port 55, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are predetermined with periodicity. The variable display starts to scroll in the direction. Then, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is statically displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . In addition, when the symbol display is finished, if the result of the internal lottery is either the low probability big hit result or the most advantageous big hit result, which will be described later, the same symbol combination is placed on any active line. It is formed. Further, in the case of an explicit high probability winning result which will be described later, the same symbol combination is not formed on any effective line, but a predetermined symbol combination is formed on any effective line.

  In addition, based on the winning in any one of the operation ports 54 and 55, the display is started in the special symbol display unit 62a and the symbol display device 61, and until a predetermined result is displayed and ended, the game number is 1 Equivalent to times. Further, the variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 61 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol sequence, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Also, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 61 is not limited to the above-described pattern. For example, only a number may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 4, when a big win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning to the first operating port 54 or the winning to the second operating port 55, it is possible to win the special electricity winning device 53. Transition to open / close execution mode. The special electric prize winning device 53 is provided with a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 51 and an open / close door 53a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The open / close door 53a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the open / close door 53a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won, and is switched to an open state in which a game ball can win when winning the transition to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery. It has become. Incidentally, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode that shifts when a hit result is obtained. Note that, in the closed state, winning may not be impossible, but it may be configured such that winning is less likely to occur than in the open state.

  Next, the center frame 65 of the symbol display unit 60 will be described.

  The center frame 65 includes a roof unit 66 that surrounds the upper and left sides of the symbol display device 61, and a stage unit 67 that is disposed below the symbol display device 61. A ball entrance 66a is formed in the left frame portion of the roof unit 66, and the game balls that have entered the ball entrance 66a are guided onto the stage unit 67 through a warp passage (not shown).

  The stage unit 67 has a rolling surface 67a on which the game ball can roll. The rolling surface 67a has a width dimension in the front-rear direction that is about two game balls, and has a smooth streamline shape that is substantially symmetrical in the lateral direction with the center portion at the center. Specifically, the rolling surface 67a is a mountain portion 67b whose central portion is raised upward, its left and right are valley portions 67c that are recessed downward, and its left and right ends are above the central portion. Located in.

  The trough portion 67c has a shape inclined downward toward the front. The game ball that has reached the trough portion 67c in a sufficiently decelerated state is guided by the inclination of the trough portion 67c and discharged from the front edge of the trough portion 67c below the stage unit 67. A front guide path that extends in the front-rear direction and inclines downward toward the front is integrally formed at the top of the mountain portion 67b. The game ball that has reached the peak portion 67b in a sufficiently decelerated state is guided by the inclination of the front guide path, and is discharged below the stage unit 67 from the front edge of the rolling surface 67a. And since the peak part 67b exists in the perpendicular | vertical upper direction of the 1st operation port 54, the game ball discharged | emitted below from the front guide path of the peak part 67b becomes easy to enter the 1st operation port 54. .

  A movable object unit 38 is provided in the upper part of the center frame 65, that is, in the upper part of the game area PA. Under the movable object unit 38, large, medium, and small movable objects in the shape of a character. 39a, 39b, 39c are provided. The contents of the movable object unit 38 and the movable accessories 39a, 39b, 39c will be described in detail later.

  An imaging unit 70 is provided between the movable accessory 39b and the movable accessory 39c. The imaging unit 70 is installed toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 and is used for imaging a player or the like existing in front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, the imaging unit 70 includes an imaging substrate 71 described later. The imaging substrate 71 includes a light emitting device 72 that emits projection light toward a measurement target, an imaging device 73 that receives reflected light reflected from the measurement target, and the like. Specific contents of the imaging substrate 71 will be described later.

  The imaging ranges IAX and IAY directed to the front of the pachinko machine 10 by the imaging unit 70 are ranges that include the rear of the player sitting in a chair placed in front of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall and playing a game. It has become. Further, the horizontal imaging range by the imaging substrate 71 is IAX as shown in FIG. 1, and the vertical imaging range is IAY. Specifically, the horizontal imaging range IAX corresponds to the horizontal width of the front door frame 14. Further, the vertical imaging range IAY includes an upper portion than the pachinko machine 10 in addition to the vertical width of the front door frame 14. Therefore, it is possible to reliably image the face portion of the player standing upright in front of the pachinko machine 10 and the face portion of the player seated on the chair arranged in front of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a main controller 81 is mounted on the back surface of the main body frame 13. The main control device 81 includes a main control board 82 that manages and manages the progress of the game in a board box. In addition, you may provide the trace structure for giving the trace means for leaving the trace of the opening to the board | substrate box, or leaving the trace of the open. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are joined in an inseparable manner, and a structure of a joint portion that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer remains on an adhesion target at the time of peeling off. A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of what has been done is pasted so as to straddle the boundaries between the plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  A sound emission control device 91 is provided above the main control device 81 on the back surface of the main body frame 13. The sound light emission control device 91 includes a sound light emission control board 92 that executes sound output control, light emission control, and control of the display control device 96 according to instructions from the main control device 81, and the sound light emission control board 92 is accommodated in the board box. Being done.

  The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the main body frame 13 including the main controller 81. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 101 formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and a payout mechanism unit 102 and a control device assembly unit 103 are attached to the back pack 101.

  The payout mechanism unit 102 includes a tank 105 to which game balls supplied from the island facility S of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 106 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 105. . The game balls paid out from the payout device 106 are discharged to the upper plate 33 or the lower plate 34 through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 106. The payout mechanism unit 102 is provided with a back pack substrate having a power switch for performing ON and OFF operations of the power source, for example, while supplying a main power of AC 24 volts.

  The control device collective unit 103 generates and outputs a predetermined power required by the payout control device 111 having a function of controlling the payout device 106 and various control devices, and is accompanied by an operation of the launch operation device 37 by the player. And a power source / launch control device 108 for controlling the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 111 and the power supply / launch control device 108 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 111 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The back pack 101 is provided with an external terminal board 109 in addition to the payout mechanism 102 and the control device collective unit 103. The external terminal plate 109 is installed at the upper corner of the back pack unit 15 on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and on the upper corner. The external terminal board 109 is a board for outputting a predetermined signal so that the management computer of the game hall recognizes the state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 7, an island facility S is provided in the game hall, and a large number of pachinko machines 10 are installed in the island facility S. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game history display unit 200. In the island facility S, a game history display unit 200 is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with each pachinko machine 10. The game history display unit 200 is mounted above the corresponding pachinko machine 10. The game history display unit 200 includes an external display device 200a for displaying various types of information, and a plurality of types of external operation units 200b that are operated to display various types of information on the external display device 200a. Is provided.

  The external display device 200a is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT, or a dot matrix display.

  In the game history display unit 200, at least one of the number of game times executed from the previous opening / closing execution mode, the number of executions of the opening / closing execution mode, the number of balls played since the opening of the game hall, the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode is Various types of information such as the number of opening / closing execution modes that have occurred in a continuing state and the number of balls in the continuing state are displayed. Thereby, the player can grasp the various information by visually recognizing the game history display unit 200. Various information displayed on the external display device 200a can be switched by operating the external operation unit 200b.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 81 includes a main control board 82 that controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 86 that monitors the power source. An MPU 83 is mounted on the main control board 82. The MPU 83 includes a ROM 84 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 83 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 84 is executed. A RAM 85, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 84 and the RAM 85 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 83, but each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 81.

  The MPU 83 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 83, a power failure monitoring board 86 provided in the main control device 81 is connected, and a payout control device 111 is connected. The power failure monitoring board 86 is connected to a power supply / launch control device 108 having a function of supplying operating power, and the MPU 83 is supplied with power via the power failure monitoring board 86.

  Various sensors such as various winning detection sensors 87a to 87e are connected to the input side of the MPU 83. The various winning detection sensors 87a to 87e are provided on a one-to-one basis with respect to winning-corresponding balls such as the general winning port 52, the special electric winning device 53, the first operating port 54, the second operating port 55, and the through gate 56. The detection sensor is included, and the MPU 83 makes a winning determination for each winning part. Further, in the MPU 83, various lotteries are executed based on winning in the first working port 54 and the second working port 55.

  On the output side of the MPU 83, a power failure monitoring board 86, a payout control device 111, and a sound emission control device 91 are connected. For example, the payout control device 111 outputs a winning ball command based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning portion. Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 91. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  On the output side of the MPU 83, a special electric drive unit 53 c that opens and closes the open / close door 53 a of the special electric prize winning device 53, a general electric drive unit 55 c that opens and closes the electric utility item 55 a of the second operating port 55, The figure unit 62 and the universal figure unit 63 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 62 is provided with a special figure display part 62 a and a special figure holding display part 62 b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 83. Similarly, the universal map unit 63 is provided with a universal map display unit 63 a and a universal map hold display unit 63 b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 83. The main control board 82 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 83 performs drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

  In other words, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 83 executes drive control of the special electricity driving unit 53c so that the special electricity prize winning device 53 is opened and closed. In addition, when the power utility item 55a is elected in the open state, the MPU 83 executes drive control of the power generator 55c so that the power utility item 55a is opened and closed. Further, in the game times and opening / closing execution modes, the display control of the special figure unit 62 is executed in the MPU 83. Further, in the case where the lottery result indicating whether or not to open the utility model 55a is clearly indicated, the MPU 83 executes display control of the universal unit 63.

  The power failure monitoring board 86 relays between the main control board 82 and the power / fire control device 108, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power / fire control device 108.

  The payout control device 111 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 106 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81. The payout control device 111 includes a payout control board 112, and an MPU 113 is mounted on the payout control board 112. The MPU 113 includes a ROM 114 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 113, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 115 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The MPU 113 is provided with an input / output port. On the input side of the MPU 113, a main control board 82, a power source / launch control device 108, a ball lending operation device 26, and a ball lending device Y are connected. In addition to the above, on the input side of the MPU 113, there are a sensor for detecting a game ball paid out from the payout device 106, and a sensor for detecting that no game ball is stored in the tank 105. A sensor for detecting that the lower plate 34 is full of game balls is electrically connected. On the other hand, the main control board 82 and the ball lending device Y are connected to the output side of the MPU 113. Further, a payout motor of the payout device 106 is electrically connected to the output side of the MPU 113.

  The MPU 113 controls the driving of the payout motor of the payout device 106 by receiving a prize ball command from the main control board 82, and pays out the number of game balls instructed in the prize ball command toward the downstream side. Further, by driving and controlling the payout motor of the payout device 106 based on the ball loan operation performed on the ball loan operation device 26, the number of game balls set by the ball loan operation are directed downstream. Let them pay out. In this case, by using the detection result of each sensor, when the designated number of game balls is paid out, the payout of the game balls is stopped and the tank 105 is in a no-ball state. Also, when the lower plate 34 becomes full, the payout of the game ball is stopped.

  The power source / launch control device 108 is connected to a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like, for example. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control device 81, the payout control device 111, and the like, and the generated operating power is supplied.

  Specifically, the power supply / launch control device 108 is provided with a power supply unit 108a for turning on power and a power supply unit 108b for power interruption while supplying power for the operation. The power supply unit 108a for charging is connected to a commercial power source in a game hall, for example, and generates operating power in a situation where external power is supplied from the commercial power source, and also supplies the generated operating power Have The power supply unit for power interruption 108b is composed of a capacitor. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON (when power is supplied from an external power supply), the power supplied from the power supply unit for power supply 108a is used. Charged. Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF or when the power is cut off such as when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply (when the power supply from the external power supply is cut off), the main power unit 108b is discharged from the power interruption. Backup power is supplied to the RAM 85 of the control device 81 and the RAM 115 of the payout control device 111. Therefore, even in this situation, the information stored in the RAM 85 of the main control device 81 and the RAM 115 of the payout control device 111 is not erased while the backup power is being supplied from the power supply unit 108b during power interruption. Retained.

  The capacity of the power interruption unit 108b is kept relatively large, and the information stored in the main RAM 85 before the power interruption is retained within a predetermined period (for example, 1 day or 2 days). The power supply unit for interruption 108b is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery or a non-rechargeable battery. In the case of a non-rechargeable battery, it is not necessary to store power to the power supply unit 108b during power interruption when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, but it is necessary to replace it periodically.

  The power supply / launch control device 108 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure (not shown) different from the power supply unit 108b for power interruption. In the power source / launch control device 108, even after the DC stable power source of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power source unit for power failure is discharged for a time sufficient for execution of power failure processing described later, The output of 5 volts, which is a drive power source for the control system, is configured to maintain a normal value. Thereby, main controller 81 etc. can perform and complete processing at the time of a power failure normally.

  The power source / fire control device 108 is provided with a fire control unit 108c in addition to the various power source units 108a and 108b. A touch sensor 37c, a variable resistor 37d, and a stop switch 37e built in the firing operation device 37 are electrically connected to the firing control unit 108c.

  The touch sensor 37c has a built-in capacitor. When the player's hand contacts the outer surface of the operation handle 37b and the capacitance of the capacitor changes, a predetermined electrical signal corresponding to the detection of the handle operation is emitted. To 108c. The firing control unit 108c recognizes that the player's hand is in contact with the outer surface of the operation handle 37b by receiving the predetermined electric signal. In addition, the firing control unit 108c grasps the presence or absence of a firing stop operation of the firing operation device 37 according to the electrical signal received from the stop switch 37e, and the operation handle 37b according to the electrical signal received through the variable resistor 37d. Know the amount of rotation.

  The firing control unit 108c transmits a condition establishment signal in a predetermined signal form to the MPU 83 when a predetermined game ball firing condition is established. Specifically, the firing control unit 108c receives a signal indicating that the operation handle 37b is touched by the player from the touch sensor 37c, and sends a signal indicating that the firing stop operation is not performed to the stop switch 37e. HI level condition satisfaction signal (signal corresponding to the condition satisfaction) is continuously transmitted to the MPU 83 on the condition that it is received from. If any of the above signals is not received, a LOW level condition establishment signal (a signal not corresponding to the condition establishment) is transmitted to the MPU 83. However, the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed. In addition to the above conditions, a condition that the ball lending device Y is connected to the pachinko machine 10 may be added as a condition for transmitting a condition satisfaction signal corresponding to the condition satisfaction.

  In the MPU 83, when the HI level condition establishment signal is received and the game ball can be permitted to be released, the HI level launch permission signal (a signal corresponding to the launch permission) is sent to the launch control unit 108c. Will continue to be sent. Note that the MPU 83 transmits a LOW level launch permission signal (a signal not corresponding to launch permission) when the HI level condition establishment signal is not received from the launch control unit 108c, but the launch permission signal LOW. The relationship between the level and the HI level may be reversed.

  When the game ball launch mechanism 45 is electrically connected and receives a HI level launch permission signal from the MPU 83, the launch control unit 108c periodically drives and controls the game ball launch mechanism 45. In this case, if the game ball is continuously supplied to the game ball launching mechanism 45, one game ball is launched into the game area PA in a specific launch cycle (specifically 0.6 sec). . Further, since the firing intensity is adjusted based on the signal received from the variable resistor 37d at the time of launching, the game ball is launched with an intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 37b.

  The audio emission control device 91 includes an audio emission control board 92 on which an MPU 93 is mounted. The MPU 93 includes a ROM 94 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 93 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 94 is executed. A RAM 95, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated.

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 83, ROM 84, and RAM 85 of the main control board 82 are referred to as the main side MPU 83, main side ROM 84, and main side RAM 85, and the MPU 93, ROM 94, and RAM 95 of the sound emission control board 92 are referred to as The sound light side MPU 93, sound light side ROM 94, and sound light side RAM 95 are referred to.

  On the output side of the sound light side MPU 93, the display light emitting unit 23, the speaker unit 24, the movable object unit driving unit 38c, the movable accessory driving units 39d, 39e, 39f, and the display control device 96 are electrically connected. Based on the command received from the main MPU 83, the display light emitting unit 23, the speaker unit 24, the movable object unit driving unit 38c, and the movable accessory driving units 39d, 39e, and 39f are driven and transmitted to the display control device 96. To do. The display control device 96 is electrically connected to the symbol display device 61 and executes display control of the symbol display device 61 based on a command received from the sound light side MPU 93. Various effects are performed using the display light emitting unit 23, the speaker unit 24, the movable object unit driving unit 38c, the movable accessory driving units 39d, 39e, and 39f, and the symbol display device 61, and the display light emitting unit 23 and the speaker unit 24 are provided. And the notification of the state of the pachinko machine 10 such as abnormality notification is performed using the symbol display device 61. In addition, an imaging substrate 71 of the imaging unit 70 is electrically connected to the input side and output side of the sound light side MPU 93, and imaging is performed on the imaging substrate 71 in accordance with the signal output from the sound light side MPU 93. At the same time, the imaging result is received by the sound light side MPU 93. In addition, an effect button 40 is electrically connected to the input side of the sound light side MPU 93, and a command for executing a predetermined effect is generated according to the signal output of the effect button 40. The command is transmitted to.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 83>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 83 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main MPU 83 uses various counter information during the game to perform winning occurrence lottery, display setting of the special symbol display unit 62a, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 61, setting of display of the general symbol display unit 63a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, the winning random number counter C1 used for the winning lottery, the big hit type counter C2 used for determining the big hit type, and the symbol display device 61 are changed. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, the display duration in the special figure display unit 62a and the symbol display device 61 are determined. The fluctuation type counter CS is used. Further, a general-purpose random number counter C4 used for lottery for determining whether or not the general-purpose role 55a of the second operating port 55 is set to the open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 85a of the RAM 85.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the special figure reservation area 85b when a winning to the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55 occurs.

  The special figure holding area 85b includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4. In the winning history to the first operating port 54 or the second operating port 55, In addition, combinations of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored as hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4.

  In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when a winning to the first operation port 54 or the second operation port 55 occurs continuously a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → second Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the reserved area RE2 → the third reserved area RE3 → the fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the first operating port 54 or the second operating port 55 are stored and stored. .

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 62a, and starting one game time At this time, determination of success or failure is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  First, the general-purpose random number counter C4 will be described. For example, the general-purpose random number counter C4 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The general-purpose random number counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the general-purpose holding area 85c of the main RAM 85 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 56. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric utility 55a to the open state based on the stored value of the general electric random number counter C4.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general electric utility 55 a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when the game ball PA is continuously fired in the same manner with respect to the game area PA, the power utility 55a of the second operation port 55 is per unit time. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the open state is relatively high.

  In the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the open state of the open call using the open call lottery using the normal call random number counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5). In the frequency support mode, the number of times that the power utility 55a is in the open state is set more frequently than in the low frequency support mode, and one open time is set to be longer. Yes. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the open state of the electric power utility is selected and the open state of the electric utility object 55a occurs a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum reserved time (i.e., the normal map) is required for the next open train lottery after the first open train lottery than in the low frequency support mode. The display continuation time for the display unit 63a is set short.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the second operation port 55 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning the first operating port 54 than in the second operating port 55, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is performed more than in the first operating port 54. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 55 increases.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the normal power open state per unit time as compared to the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, for example, in the general power open lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability that it will be elected in an open state of a public train. In addition, a reserved time (for example, executed in the general map display unit 63a based on winning to the through gate 56) after the next public train opening lottery is performed and the next public train opening lottery is performed. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of variable display time) are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that a short securing time is easily selected or the average secure time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. Also good. Furthermore, increase the number of times of opening, lengthen the opening time, and shorten the reserved time that will be secured when the next public train opening lottery is performed after the first public train opening lottery is performed, the reserved time concerned The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of conditions among shortening the average time and increasing the winning probability.

  When the public power open lottery using the general power random number counter C4 is won, the public power open state is entered. The public power open state is terminated when a predetermined number of times the power utility 55a is opened or closed, or when a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the second operation port 55. To do. Specifically, the above upper limit number is 10 in both the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode. On the other hand, the number of times of opening / closing of the utility model 55a is one in the low-frequency support mode, whereas the high-frequency support mode is more often than in the low-frequency support mode. There are three times. In addition, the duration of one opening of the utility model 55a is 1 sec in the low frequency support mode, whereas it is 2 sec in the high frequency support mode.

  Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. For example, the winning random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 599, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to zero. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial random number counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the holding area RE of the special figure holding area 85b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 54 or the second operating port 55. Then, the determination of success / failure is performed using the value of the stored random number counter C1.

  The random number value that is won in the determination of the success / failure is stored in the main ROM 84 as a success / failure table. In the success / failure table, a jackpot result and a miss result are set as the success / failure results. The jackpot result is a success / failure result that can trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electricity prize winning device 53 is controlled to open / close, and can be a transition trigger for at least one of the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode. The losing result is a success / failure result that does not trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and also does not trigger the transition for the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode.

  As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the low probability mode and a success / failure table for the high probability mode are set. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as the lottery modes in the winning lottery means. In the gaming state in which the low-probability mode winning / failing table is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers for winning the jackpot is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the high-probability mode success / failure table is referred to in the lottery, the number of random number values to be a big win is set larger than when the low-probability mode success / failure table is referenced. Specifically, there are 20 pieces. In this case, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the high probability mode.

  If the probability of winning a jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary, and in the situation of the low probability mode, In the situation where the value group of the winning random number counter C1 is in the high probability mode, only a part may be included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that is a big hit, or a configuration may not be included. .

  Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The big hit type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the holding area RE of the special figure holding area 85b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 54 or the second operating port 55. Then, the distribution determination is performed using the stored value of the big hit type counter C2.

  Here, in this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of jackpot results are set. These jackpot results are (1) the contents of the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the contents of the success / failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, ( 3) At least one of the three contents of the support mode after completion of the opening / closing execution mode is different.

  The opening / closing execution mode that is executed when the big hit is won is a round number regulation mode that is executed with a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit. A round game is a game that continues until one of the following conditions is satisfied: a predetermined opening duration has elapsed and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls have won the special electric prize device 53. That is. In addition, the number of round games executed in the round number regulation mode is the same for a fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

  In the round number regulation mode, the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode are set so that the occurrence frequency of the winning to the special electricity winning device 53 is relatively high during the period from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. And are set. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10, a single opening mode of the special prize winning device 53 is set in a plurality of types with different opening durations from when the special prize winning device 53 is opened until it is closed. Yes. Specifically, a long-time mode set to 29 sec, which is a long open duration, and a short-time mode set to 0.05 sec, which is a shorter duration than the above long time, are set. ing. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the launch operation device 37 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 45 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Is done. In the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to 10. Then, in the long time mode among the above open modes, the open duration time is set longer than the product of the game ball firing period and the upper limit number of one round game. On the other hand, in the short time mode, an opening duration time is set that is shorter than the product of the launching period of the game balls and the upper limit number of one round game, more specifically, shorter than the launching period of the game balls. ing. Therefore, when the special electricity prize winning device 53 is opened once in a long time mode, it is expected that the special electricity prize winning device 53 will receive the maximum number of prizes in one round game. When the special electric prize winning device 53 is opened once in the aspect, it is expected that no special electric prize winning device 53 is won.

  In the high-frequency winning mode, the special electricity winning device 53 is opened once in each round game in a long-time manner. That is, the special electric prize winning device 53 is opened 15 times in a long-time manner. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the special prize winning device 53 is opened once in each round game in a short time mode. That is, the special electricity prize winning device 53 is opened 15 times in a short time mode.

  In addition, the number of times of opening / closing the special electric prize device 53 in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game are those in the high frequency winning mode. As long as the occurrence frequency of winning in the special electricity winning device 53 is higher than the low-frequency winning mode until the opening / closing execution mode is started and ended, the value is not limited to the above value. It is.

  The types of jackpot result type for the jackpot type counter C2 are stored in the main ROM 84 as a sorting table. In the distribution table, as the types of jackpot results, a low probability jackpot result, an explicit high probability jackpot result, and a most advantageous jackpot result are set.

  The low probability big hit result is a big hit result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode is finished, the winning lottery mode before shifting to the open / close execution mode becomes any low probability mode. This low-probability mode is the next jackpot result, and at least continues until it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. Further, after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the jackpot result is the high frequency support mode regardless of the support mode before the switching to the opening / closing execution mode. This high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically 100 times) set as the number of times of 1 or more after the transition. The low-frequency support mode that has been shifted to after the completion of the step will be the next jackpot result, and will at least continue until it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The explicit high-accuracy big hit result is that the opening / closing execution mode is the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, the high-probability mode is set regardless of whether the winning lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode is changed, and the opening / closing execution is executed. It is a jackpot result that becomes the high-frequency support mode regardless of the support mode before the mode transition. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are the next jackpot results, and at least continue until the switching to the opening / closing execution mode is performed.

  The most advantageous jackpot result is that the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, the high-probability mode is set regardless of whether the winning lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode shifts, and the opening / closing execution mode It is a jackpot result that becomes the high frequency support mode regardless of the support mode before the transition. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are the next jackpot results, and at least continue until the switching to the opening / closing execution mode is performed.

  In the distribution table, out of the big hit type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the low probability big hit result, and “10 to 14” corresponds to the explicit high probability big hit result. , “15-29” corresponds to the most favorable jackpot result.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 61. The expected effect includes a symbol display device 61 capable of performing variable display of symbols, and in a gaming machine in which a final stop result is a given correspondence result in a game round that results in a predetermined jackpot result, the symbol display device 61 This is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to be the above-mentioned giving correspondence result at the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the symbol variable display is started. In addition, about the provision corresponding | compatible result, the combination of the symbol to which the same number was attached | subjected on one of the effective lines is stopped and displayed.

  In the expected effect, two types of reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display and the generation of the result of giving correspondence at a stage before the reach display occurs are set.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by displaying symbols for a part of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the symbol display device 61, and the symbols in the remaining symbol sequences are displayed in that state. A display state for performing variable display is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation of the symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen, and the reach effect is performed. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on almost the entire symbol display device 61 after the combination of reach symbols is reduced or hidden.

  In the notice display, in the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the symbol variation display is started in the symbol display device 61, or in some symbol sequences, a plurality of symbols are displayed. In a situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol row, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. Also, the background screen is set to a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set to a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and a message is displayed on the background screen. What makes it the aspect made to include is also included. Such a notice display can occur in any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the probability that the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. Is set to occur.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times in which the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped. In addition, the game times corresponding to the jackpot result in which the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed are not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the losing result, the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the main ROM 84 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. It is executed when

  On the other hand, whether or not to perform the notice display is determined not by the main MPU 83 but by the sound light MPU 93. In this case, in the sound side MPU 93, the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results are easier to generate a notice display than the game times corresponding to the missed result, and a notice display having a low appearance rate is generated. A lottery process for displaying a notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions of being easy to do. Incidentally, the lottery result is reflected when the game display effect is executed on the symbol display device 61.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the main MPU 83 determines the display continuation time in the special symbol display unit 62a and the symbol display continuation time in the symbol display device 61. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the special symbol display unit 62a and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 61.

<About various processes executed by the main MPU 83>
Next, various processes executed to advance the game in the main MPU 83 will be described. The main MPU 83 is roughly divided into a main process that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in the pachinko machine 10 at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, main processing in the main MPU 83 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S101, a power-on wait process on the main side is executed. In the power-on wait process on the main side, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until 1 sec elapses after the main process is activated. In the subsequent step S102, access to the main RAM 85 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the main MPU 83 is set.

  Thereafter, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power / fire control device 108 is manually operated. In subsequent step S105, “1” is set to the power failure flag of the main RAM 85. It is determined whether or not. In step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed. In subsequent step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is checked. judge.

  In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when a game hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality of data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 85 is cleared as initialization of the main RAM 85. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, step S109 is executed without executing step S108 on condition that the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal. Proceed to

  In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 85 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is given to the sound emission control device 91 in order to recognize the current gaming state. To send to.

  Then, it progresses to the residual process of step S110-step S113. That is, the MPU 83 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S110, an interrupt prohibition setting is performed in order to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process. In the subsequent step S111, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and a change counter update process for updating the change type counter CS is executed in step S112. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 85, and the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the read-out counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S113, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is performed. If the process of step S113 is performed, it will return to step S110 and will repeat the process of step S110-step S113.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the main MPU 83 will be described. The main control board 82 is provided with a clock circuit as pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and further divided so as to exist in the middle of the signal path between the clock circuit and the main MPU 83. A peripheral circuit is provided.

  The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing unit that changes the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt processing in the main MPU 83. . That is, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the main MPU 83 at intervals of a specific cycle of 4 msec. The main MPU 83 executes processing for confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as the rise or fall of the pulse signal, and starts timer interrupt processing with at least one condition confirming the occurrence of the specific signal form. And execute.

  In this case, when the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed in the situation where the start of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer is changed when the interrupt is permitted from the state where the interrupt is prohibited. Interrupt processing is started. In other words, depending on the execution status of the process in the main MPU 83, the next timer interrupt process may start after 4.1 msec from the start of the previous timer interrupt process. The next timer interrupt process is started after 3.9 msec from the start of the immediately preceding timer interrupt process.

  However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency divider circuit is performed at a specific cycle of 4 msec regardless of the progress of the process in the main MPU 83, the timer interrupt processing is basically started at a specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the main MPU 83 is such that even if the timer interrupt process at a predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific period since the previous timer interrupt process was started, The timer interrupt process at this timing absorbs the amount exceeding the specific period, and the timer interrupt process at the next timing is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure information storage process is executed in step S201. In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is received from the power outage monitoring board 86, and when the occurrence of a power outage is specified, the process during power outage is executed. In the power failure process, after various data settings are made so that the state before power shut-off can be restored at the next power-on, the system waits until the supply of operating power to the main MPU 83 is completely shut off.

  In subsequent step S202, a lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary power random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after executing the process of sequentially reading the current numerical information from the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general power random number counter C4, and adding 1 to each of the read numerical information, A process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value.

  Thereafter, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the variation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112. In a succeeding step S205, a game stop determination process is executed. In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game is to be stopped. If the progress of the game is to be stopped, the execution of the process for progressing the game is stopped. Specifically, by making an affirmative determination in step S206, the process for advancing the game in steps S207 to S218 is not executed. If the game progress is to be stopped, a command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 so that notification corresponding to the event that triggered the game progress is executed. The state in which the progress of the game is stopped and the notification corresponding thereto are started again when the power is turned on only by stopping the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 83, and the operating power to the main MPU 83 is After the supply is stopped, the supply of the operating power is started while the RAM erase switch of the power supply / emission control device 108 is pressed, so that the main RAM 85 is not executed as the initialization is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped, and the processing after step S207 is executed on the condition that the progress of the game is not stopped.

  In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 53c and 55c is executed. For example, when the information for switching the special electric prize winning device 53 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 53c is started, and the information for switching to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal.

  In addition, when the information for switching the general electric utility 55a of the second working port 55 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the general electric drive unit 55c should be started and switched to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  In a succeeding step S208, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  In subsequent step S209, a winning detection process is executed. In the winning detection process, signals received from the winning detection sensors 87a to 87e are read, and the general winning port 52, the special electricity winning device 53, the first operating port 54, the second operating port 55, and the through gate 56 are read. A process for specifying whether or not there is a ball is executed.

  In the subsequent step S210, timer update processing for updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 85 is executed. In this case, the timer counter that is updated by subtracting the stored numerical information is handled in an integrated manner. However, both the updating of the subtracting timer counter and the updating of the adding timer counter are performed collectively. It is good also as a structure.

  In subsequent step S211, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred is executed. In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of any one of magnetism, radio waves, and vibrations is confirmed using the detection results of the corresponding detection sensors. When it is confirmed that any of the fraud handling events has occurred, the game stop setting is performed in step S205 in the next timer interrupt process, and an affirmative determination is made in step S206.

  In the subsequent step S212, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed. In a situation where the launch operation is continued with respect to the launch operation device 37, as described above, one game ball is launched at a predetermined launch period of 0.6 sec.

  In the subsequent step S213, as the input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process in step S208, the disconnection confirmation of the winning detection sensors 87a to 87e and the opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are confirmed. Do.

  In the subsequent step S214, special figure special electric control processing for performing execution control of game times and execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. The details of the special figure special electric control process will be described later in detail.

  In the subsequent step S215, the ordinary power control process is executed. In the ordinary power transmission control process, when winning to the through gate 56 occurs, a process for acquiring numerical information of the general electric random number counter C4 is executed and the numerical information is stored. The numerical value information is determined to be released, and further, with the opening determination as a trigger, a process for performing an effect for a general map is executed in the general map display unit 63a. In addition, based on the result of the opening determination, a process for opening and closing the common utility 55a of the second working port 55 is executed.

  In subsequent step S216, based on the processing results of immediately preceding steps S214 and S215, setting of output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the special figure display unit 62a in the special figure hold display unit 62b, The output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the figure display unit 63a to the general figure hold display unit 63b is set. In step S216, output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 62a is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S214 and S215, and the display content of the general map display unit 63a is set. Set the output information to be updated.

  In the subsequent step S217, the content of the command received from the payout control device 111 is confirmed, and a payout state receiving process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. In step S218, a payout output process for setting a prize ball command as an output target is executed.

<Special Figure Special Electric Control Process>
Next, the special figure special power control process executed in step S214 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) of the main MPU 83 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the special figure special electric control process, when the winning information to the first working port 54 or the second working port 55 is generated, a process for obtaining the holding information is executed and the holding information is stored. A determination for whether or not the hold information is true is made, and further, a process for performing an effect for the game round is executed using the decision as to whether or not the information is appropriate. In addition, based on the result of the determination, the processing for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode after the effect for playing the game is executed, and the processing during the opening / closing execution mode and at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  Specifically, first, hold information acquisition processing is executed in step S301. In the acquisition process, when the winning of the game ball to the first operating port 54 occurs or when the winning of the game ball to the second operating port 55 occurs, the special figure holding area 85b is reserved. Each value of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set on condition that the number of the hold information stored in the area RE is less than the upper limit value (specifically “4”). Stored in the uppermost area of the holding area RE where no holding information is stored.

  In the acquisition process, when the hold information is acquired, a hold command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The sound light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received hold command to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 receives the hold command, and changes the display of the number of hold information on the symbol display device 61 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold. When the number of the hold information increases as described above, the display control process in step S216 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) displays so as to change to the display content corresponding to the increase in the hold number. Control is performed.

  In the subsequent step S302, the information of the special figure special electricity counter provided in the main RAM 85 is read out, and in the step S303, the special figure special electric address table stored in the main ROM 84 is read out. In step S304, a start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special power counter is acquired from the special figure special electric address table.

  Here, the processing content of step S302-step S304 is demonstrated.

  As already described, the special figure special power control process includes a process for controlling the effect for game play and a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode. In this case, as a process for controlling the effect for game times, a special figure variation start process (step S306) that is a process for starting the effect for game times and an effect for game times are advanced. And a special figure changing process (step S308), which is a process for ending the effect for the game round, is set.

  Also, as a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode, a special electricity start process (step S309) which is a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode opening, and a process for controlling the open state of the special electricity prize winning device 53 Special electric power opening process (step S310), special electric power closing apparatus processing (step S311) which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special electric prize winning device 53, ending of the opening / closing execution mode and opening / closing execution mode end A special electric power end process (step S312), which is a process for controlling the transition of the gaming state, is set.

  In such a processing configuration, the special figure special power counter is a counter for the main side MPU 83 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plural types of processing should be executed. Corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter, the start address of the program for executing the above-mentioned plural types of processing is set.

  In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation start process (step S306), and the start address SA1 is the program address for executing the special figure variation process (step S307). The start address SA2 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure finalizing process (step S308), and the start address SA3 is the program address for executing the special electricity start process (step S309). The start address SA4 is a start address of a program for executing the special power open process (step S310), and the start address SA5 is a program for executing the special power close process (step S311). This is the start address, and the start address SA6 A start address of a program for executing (step S312).

  The special figure special electric power counter is the special figure special electric power control in the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed. Corresponding to the process executed in the process, 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or “0” is cleared. Therefore, in the special figure special power control process at each processing time, a process corresponding to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric power counter may be executed. The special figure special electricity counter is set to 0 as an initial value.

  After executing the process of step S304, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S304 is executed in step S305. Specifically, if the acquired start address is SA0, the process jumps to the special figure change start process in step S306. If the acquired start address is SA1, the process jumps to the special figure change process in step S307. If the acquired start address is SA2, the process jumps to the special figure determining process in step S308. If the acquired start address is SA3, the process jumps to the special electricity start process in step S309. If it is SA4, the process jumps to the special power open process in step S310. If the acquired start address is SA5, the process jumps to the special power close process in step S311. If the acquired start address is SA6. The process jumps to the special electricity ending process in step S312. When any one of steps S306 to S312 is executed, the special figure special power control process is terminated. Hereinafter, the process of step S306-step S312 is demonstrated separately.

<Special map start processing>
First, the special figure variation start process of step S306 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S401, it is determined whether or not holding information is stored in the special figure holding area 85b. If a negative determination is made in step S401, the special figure variation start process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S401, the process proceeds to step S402.

  In step S402, a data setting process is executed. In the data setting process, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first reservation area RE1 and the second The data in each area is shifted such as the reserved area RE2 → the first reserved area RE1, the third reserved area RE3 → the second reserved area RE2, and the fourth reserved area RE4 → the third reserved area RE3. At this time, a shift command for causing the sound emission control device 91 to recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted may be set as an output target and transmitted.

  In a succeeding step S403, an appropriateness determination process is executed. In the success / failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success / failure lottery mode is a high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, referring to the high probability mode success / failure table provided in the main ROM 84, it is acquired from the information stored in the execution area AE, ie, the information for the success / failure determination, that is, the winning random number counter C1. It is determined whether or not the obtained numerical information matches the high probability jackpot numerical information. In the case of the low probability mode, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is referred to the low probability mode determination table provided in the main ROM 84. It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot value information.

  In a succeeding step S404, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process in the step S403 is a jackpot winning result. If the result is a big win, the distribution determination process is executed in step S405. In the allocation determination process, information for allocation determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Then, with reference to the distribution table provided in the main ROM 84, it is specified which jackpot result corresponds to the numerical information of the grasped jackpot type counter C2. Specifically, it specifies which jackpot result corresponds to the low likelihood jackpot result, the explicit high likelihood jackpot result, or the most advantageous jackpot result.

  In the subsequent step S406, a stop result setting process for the big hit result is executed. Specifically, information on the pattern mode that is finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 62a in the game round relating to the start of the current fluctuation is obtained from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in the main ROM 84 in advance. The specified information is stored in the main RAM 85. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, information on the pattern mode to be stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 62a is set differently for each type of the jackpot result.

  The information on the type of the picture to be stopped and displayed is determined according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In this case, the pattern mode may be set corresponding to each jackpot result on a one-to-one basis, and a plurality of types of pattern modes may be set for each jackpot result.

  In subsequent step S407, a flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed. Specifically, the main RAM 85 is provided with a flag corresponding to each type of jackpot result, and in step S407, among the flags corresponding to each type of jackpot result, the distribution determination result in step S405 is displayed. Set “1” to the corresponding flag.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S404 that the result is not a jackpot winning result, a stop result setting process for a losing result is executed in step S408. Specifically, the stop result table for the outlier result stored in advance in the main ROM 84 is information on the pattern mode that is finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 62a in the game round corresponding to the start of the current fluctuation. And the specified information is stored in the main RAM 85. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  After executing any one of steps S407 and S408, display continuation time acquisition processing is executed in step S409. In the acquisition process, the display at the current game time is determined according to the current gaming state, the result of the determination process, the result of the distribution determination process, the presence / absence of reach display, the number of hold information, and the value of the variation type counter CS. Get the duration information. For example, in a situation where a reach effect occurs, the display duration time is set longer than in a situation where a reach effect does not occur. In addition, when the result of the determination process is out of order, in a situation where the reach effect does not occur, the display duration time is set to be shorter when the number of hold information is three or more than two or less.

  After the display continuation time acquisition process is executed in step S409, the process proceeds to step S410, and the display continuation time information acquired in step S409 is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. The update of the numerical information set in the timer counter is executed by the timer update process (FIG. 11) already described. By the way, as an effect for the game times, the symbol variation display on the special symbol display unit 62a and the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 61 are performed. In a state where the stop result is displayed (in the symbol display device 61, a combination of predetermined symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line), the final stop is displayed for the final stop time. In this case, the display continuation time acquired in step S409 is a time obtained by subtracting the final stop time from the total time for one game.

  In subsequent step S411, the change command and the type command are transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The change command has a data structure of 2 bytes. The 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process, and display duration time. And corresponding data. Specifically, the identification data for indicating that it is a change command is set by the upper 4 bits of the 2-byte data, and the validity determination process is performed by the next 4 bits of data. In addition, lottery result data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is set, and time data corresponding to the display duration time is set by the remaining 8-bit data. Therefore, when the sound side MPU 93 receives the change command, the sound side MPU 93 recognizes the change command from the identification data, and uses the lottery result data to determine the result of the success or failure determination process and the result of the distribution determination process. And the display duration of the current game time is recognized from the time data. Here, since the main MPU 83 selects a different display continuation time depending on whether or not reach occurs, even if the information on whether or not reach occurs is included in the change command, the sound light MPU 93 displays it. It is possible to specify the presence or absence of reach from the duration information. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

  The type command has a 2-byte data structure, and the 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process, and the type of the success / failure lottery mode. And data corresponding to the number of remaining continuations of the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, the identification data for indicating that it is a type command is set by the upper 4 bits of the 2-byte data, and the validity determination process and the following 4 bits of data are set. The lottery result data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is set, and the remaining 8-bit data is the data corresponding to the type of the lottery mode and the remaining number of times corresponding to the remaining number of times of the high frequency support mode. Data is set. Therefore, when receiving the type command, the sound side MPU 93 recognizes the type command from the identification data, and recognizes the result of the determination process and the result of the distribution determination process from the lottery result data. The type of success / failure lottery mode and the remaining number of continuations in the high frequency support mode are recognized from the data for the number of continuations.

  Here, both the change command and the type command include data corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process and the result of the distribution determination process. Therefore, the sound light side MPU 93 collates the lottery result data included in the variation command with the lottery result data included in the type command, so that noise or the like is received with respect to the reception of the variation command and the type command. It is possible to specify whether or not a communication abnormality has occurred. And when both the lottery result data match, the production control corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command is executed, and when both the lottery result data do not match Can notify it. Incidentally, in the latter case, the sound light side MPU 93 may execute an effect for game times corresponding to the communication abnormality in the game times. For example, in the effect for game times, the determination processing and the determination of distribution are performed. Regardless of the result of the processing, the symbol display device 61 may reliably stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to complete detachment. In this case, the game turn effect may be configured to be performed over a display duration corresponding to the time data included in the variation command, or may be configured to continue until the next variation command and type command are received. Also good.

  After performing the process of step S411, the display of the variation of the pattern in the special figure display part 62a is started in step S412. In the subsequent step S413, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter. In this case, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed is “0”. Therefore, when the process of step S413 is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is “1”. " Thereafter, the special figure variation start process is terminated.

<Special map change processing>
Next, the special figure changing process in step S307 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 12) will be described.

  In the special figure changing process, it is determined whether it is during the game time duration and before the final stop display, and if it is before the final stop display, the display mode of the pattern in the special figure display unit 62a is determined. A process for changing regularly is executed. This regular change is continued until it is time to start the final stop display. Further, this regular change is performed in a certain manner regardless of whether or not a hit result is obtained and whether or not reach display occurs.

  Also, instead of waiting in the special figure changing process until the final stop display timing is reached, if it is not the final stop display timing, this special figure is executed after executing the above regular change process. The process during change is terminated. Therefore, after the game-turn effect is started, the special-figure changing process is started every time the special-figure special-electric control process is started until the final stop display timing comes. In addition, when it is time to display the final stop, a final stop command is transmitted to the sound side MPU 93 in order to display the stop result of the current game round on the symbol display device 61 for final stop display. The display mode of the picture on the display unit 62a is set to a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of this game time. Further, information on the final stop time (0.5 sec) of the game times is read from the main ROM 84 and set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. Then, by adding 1 to the value of the special figure special electric counter, the value of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure changing process to the one corresponding to the special figure finalizing process.

<Processing during special figure determination>
Next, the special figure determining process in step S308 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 12) will be described.

  In the special chart finalizing process, if the final stop time of the current game round has not elapsed, the special chart finalizing process is terminated as it is, and if the final stop time of the current game round has elapsed If the result of the determination of success / failure that triggered the current game is an out-of-game result, the special figure special counter is cleared to “0”, and then the processing for determining the special figure is terminated. If the result of the determination of success / failure is any jackpot result, processing for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  In the process for switching to the opening / closing execution mode, information on the opening time (for example, 4 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 84 is read, and the information on the opening time is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. Incidentally, the opening time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Also, an opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The opening command is a command for causing the sound light side MPU 93 to recognize that it is the timing for starting the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. The opening command also includes information indicating which of the various jackpot results is the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the sound light side MPU 93 can execute the effect in the opening / closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the special figure special electric counter is incremented by one. In this case, since the value of the special figure special power counter is “2” when the special figure determination process is executed, the value of the special figure special electric power counter is “3”. Thereafter, the special figure finalizing process is terminated.

<Special electricity start processing>
Next, the special electricity start process of step S309 in the special figure special electricity control process (FIG. 12) will be described.

  In the special power start process, it is determined whether or not the opening time in the current opening / closing execution mode has elapsed. If the opening time has elapsed, 15 is set in the round counter provided in the main RAM 85 and the main RAM 85 Is set to 10 in the winning counter provided. The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games in the opening / closing execution mode by the main MPU 83, and the winning counter is the upper limit number of game balls in one round game or one opening / closing number regulation mode. The main MPU 83 specifies whether or not a winning has occurred. Then, an opening continuation time corresponding to the jackpot result is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter, and the special electric prize winning device 53 is brought into an opened state. Further, when the special prize winning device 53 is opened, an opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. By receiving the opening command, the sound light side MPU 93 executes control for switching the effect in the opening / closing execution mode accordingly. After the special electricity winning device 53 is opened, the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by 1, and the special electricity start process is terminated. In this case, since the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “3” when the special electricity start process is executed, it becomes “4” after 1 is added.

<Processing during opening of special electricity>
Next, the special power open process in step S310 in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 12) will be described.

  In the special electric release opening process, it is determined whether or not an end condition of one round game is satisfied. If the end condition is satisfied, the special electric prize device 53 is closed and a close command is issued. Transmit to the optical MPU 93. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter after 1 subtraction is “0”. If it is not “0”, the closing time is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. The closing time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, and is specifically 1 sec longer than the game ball firing cycle. When the special electricity prize winning device 53 is in the closed state, the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by 1 regardless of whether the value of the round counter is “0” or not. In this case, the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the special electricity release process is executed is “4”, so “1” is added after the addition of 1.

<Treatment during special electricity closure>
Next, the special electricity closing process in step S311 in the special figure special electricity control process (FIG. 12) will be described.

  In the special electricity closing process, it is determined whether or not the round counter is “0”. If it is not “0”, it is determined whether or not the closing time has elapsed. If the closing time has not elapsed, the special electric power closing process is terminated as it is, and if the closing time has elapsed, the special electric prize winning device 53 is opened and the opening / closing execution mode of this time is executed. The opening duration corresponding to the hit result is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. Further, when the special prize winning device 53 is opened, an opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. Thereafter, after the special figure special electricity counter is decremented by 1, this special electricity closed process is terminated. In this case, since the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the special electricity closing process is executed is “5”, it becomes “4” after 1 subtraction.

  On the other hand, when the round counter is “0”, an ending command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The ending command is a command for causing the sound light side MPU 93 to recognize that it is a timing for starting an effect for ending. The ending command also includes information indicating which of the various jackpot results is the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the sound light side MPU 93 can execute the ending effect in a manner corresponding to the game result triggered by the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the information on the ending time (for example, 6 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 84 is read, and the information on the ending time is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. Incidentally, the ending time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Thereafter, after the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by 1, this special electricity closed process is terminated. In this case, since the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “5” when the special electricity closing process is executed, it becomes “6” after 1 is added.

<Special electricity termination processing>
Next, the special electric power end process of step S312 in the special graphic special electric control process (FIG. 12) will be described.

  In the special electric power end process, it is determined whether or not the ending time has passed. If the ending time has not passed, the special electric power end process is ended as it is. If the ending time has elapsed, set the contents of the success / failure lottery mode and support mode after the opening / closing execution mode to the contents corresponding to the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode, Further, after the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0”, the special electricity termination process is terminated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 2 msec) in the sound light side MPU 93 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the sound light side MPU 93.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S501, a timer subtraction process for subtracting the value of each counter or timer is executed. In the subsequent step S502, the main-side command storage process is executed. The main-side command storage process is a process for storing a command in the sound light side RAM 95 when a command is received from the main-side MPU 83. The sound light side RAM 95 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 83. The commands received from the main MPU 83 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer and stored. The data are sequentially read according to the order.

  In a succeeding step S503, main-side command response processing for executing processing corresponding to the command received from the main-side MPU 83 is executed. Specific contents of the main-side command handling process will be described later in detail. In step S504, a light emission control process for controlling the light emission of the display light emitting unit 23 is executed according to the data table read in step S503. In step S505, the speaker unit 24 is executed in accordance with the data table read in step S503. The sound output control process for controlling the sound output is executed, and in step S506, according to the data table read in step S503, the movable object unit drive unit 38c of the movable object unit 38 and the movable accessories 39a, 39b, and 39c. A movable object control process for driving and controlling the movable accessory driving units 39d, 39e, and 39f is executed.

  After executing the process of step S506, after executing the processes of steps S507 to S511 for using the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Main command processing>
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the main-side command response process in step S503 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14).

  First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 83. If these commands are received, game result storage processing is executed in step S602. Specifically, based on the information included in the type command, information on which is the result of the lottery determination or distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 83 at the start of the current game round, that is, the current game Information indicating whether the game result of the game is the most advantageous big hit result, the explicit high probability big hit result, the low likelihood big hit result, or the outlier result is specified, and the specified information is written in the sound light side RAM 95.

  In subsequent step S603, a lottery table read process is executed. Specifically, with reference to any type table set at the start of the game or after the specified number of rotations, the lottery table corresponding to the change command and the type command received in step S601 is read from the sound light side ROM 94. Read to the side RAM 95. The type table is provided in the sound-side ROM 94, and there are a plurality of type tables corresponding to the event that the player is paying attention to. Details of the event that the player is paying attention to and the type table will be described later.

  In step S604, a notice lottery process is performed for determining whether or not to make a notice display on the symbol display device 61 in the current game round by lottery. Here, in such a notice display, since the symbol display is started by the symbol display device 61, the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, or some symbol columns are displayed. In the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a message is displayed on the symbol display device 61. The notice display can occur in any game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed. The notice display is more likely to occur when reach display is performed than when reach display is not performed. In addition, the notice display is more likely to occur in the case of a jackpot result than in the case of a miss result.

  In the subsequent step S605, a stop symbol determination process is executed with reference to any type table read to the sound light side RAM 95. In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is the most advantageous big hit result, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on one active line L1 to L5 is displayed as the stop result of this time. It is determined as information. In this case, the same symbol type and valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. However, odd symbols are easily selected as symbols forming the same symbol combination. Also, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a low probability winning result, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same even symbol combination is established on one active line L1 to L5, It is determined as information on the result of this stop. In this case, the same symbol type and valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is an explicit high probability winning result, it is different from the combination of the same symbols on the one effective line L1 to L5 and different from the combination of the reach symbols. Information corresponding to the stop result in which the symbol combination is established is determined as information on the current stop result. Also, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a missed result, the presence or absence of reach display is specified from the contents of the change command. And when reach display occurs, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the reach symbol combination is established on one or two effective lines L1 to L5. Information corresponding to the stop result to be determined is determined as information on the current stop result. On the other hand, when reach display does not occur, this is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the reach symbol combination is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5. Information corresponding to the result is determined as information on the current stop result.

  In the subsequent step S606, a process for determining an effect pattern of the current game time is executed with reference to any type table read to the sound side RAM 95. In this process, first, when reach display occurs, the contents of reach production are specified by lottery. In addition, when the jackpot result is obtained, the contents of the effect for notifying the player of the jackpot are specified by lottery. Then, information on the display duration of the game times is specified from the contents of the variation command and the type command received this time. When reach display occurs and the jackpot result is obtained, information on the display duration, information on the game result specified in step S602, information on the lottery result of the notice lottery process specified in step S604, the process The effect pattern corresponding to the combination of the information on the lottery result of the reach effect specified in the above and the information on the lottery result of the jackpot notification specified in the processing is selected. In addition, when the reach display does not occur, an effect corresponding to the combination of the display duration information, the game result information specified in step S602 and the lottery result information of the notice lottery process specified in step S604. Select a pattern.

  In the subsequent step S607, storage processing of the effect pattern type and the stop symbol is executed. Specifically, the information specified in step S605 and step S606 is written in the sound light side RAM 95. In step S608, a data table corresponding to the type of effect pattern selected in step S606 and the type of stop symbol determined in step S605 is read from the sound side ROM 94 to the sound side RAM 95. In the light emission control process (step S504) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 23 is performed according to the data table. In the sound output control process (step S505) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), the data table. The sound output control of the speaker unit 24 is performed in accordance with the moving object control process (step S506) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14), according to the data table, of the movable object unit driving unit 38c and the movable accessory driving units 39d, 39e, 39f. Drive control is performed. The data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first outlier reach data table. The first outreach data table is that the sound light side MPU 93 performs the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 23 and the speaker unit 24 within a display duration of 20 seconds that results in a notice effect and a reach effect and finally results in a disengagement. This is a data table showing the timing for performing the sound output control, and the drive control of the movable object unit drive unit 38c and the movable accessory drive units 39d, 39e, 39f.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in the first outreach data table, pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the production corresponding to the display continuation time of the target game times is set. Thus, the contents of the task and information on the presence / absence of command output are set.

  The task content information includes the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 23 corresponding to the current game round, the sound output control of the speaker unit 24, the drive control of the movable object unit driving unit 38c and the movable accessory driving units 39d, 39e, and 39f. The information is set to perform the process, and processing corresponding to the information of the task content is performed at the update timing of each effect.

  Specifically, with respect to the first outlier reach data table shown in FIG. 16, data at the start of variation is set in the pointer information “0”, and data at the start of the notice effect is set in the pointer information “200”. The data at the end of the notice effect is set in the pointer information “400”, the data at the time of starting the normal reach is set in the pointer information “500”, and the end of the change in the pointer information “1000”. Is set. Each piece of pointer information corresponds to a delimiter timing such as the start of the effect, the change of the effect, and the end of the effect. The pointer information other than these includes light emission control of the display light emitting unit 23 between break timings, sound output control of the speaker unit 24, drive control of the movable object unit driving unit 38c and the movable accessory driving units 39d, 39e, and 39f. Update data is set to enable this.

  The information on the presence / absence of command output is information indicating the presence / absence of a command output from the sound light side MPU 93 to the display control device 96 and the type of the command. The display-side MPU receives a command from the sound-light-side MPU 93 at a predetermined timing, thereby controlling the light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 23, the sound output control of the speaker unit 24, the movable object unit driving unit 38c, and the movable accessory driving unit 39d. , 39e, 39f is subjected to display control for displaying on the symbol display device 61 an image corresponding to the content of the drive control.

  In the first outlier reach data table shown in FIG. 16, specifically, command data is set for pointer information of “0” in which data at the start of change is set in the task content. Therefore, at the start of the change of the game times, the display side MPU controls the display of the symbol display device 61 based on the command transmission from the sound light side MPU 93 to the display side MPU. As a result, an image corresponding to the start of the variation of the game times is displayed on the symbol display device 61. Also, in the contents of the task, pointer information of the update timing of the presentation before each pointer information in which the data at the start of the notice effect, the data at the start of normal reach, and the data at the end of change are set, specifically, The command data is set for each pointer information of “198”, “498”, and “998”. Therefore, command transmission from the sound light side MPU 93 to the display side MPU is performed in advance for the break timings other than when the game times change starts, and the contents of light emission control, sound output control, and drive control are performed at these break timings. And the display content of the symbol display device 61 can be completely synchronized.

  Returning to the description of the main-side command handling process (FIG. 15), after executing the process of step S608, the game number updating process is executed in step S609, and the process corresponding to the other command is executed in step S610. Then, the main command processing is terminated. In processing according to other commands, for example, it is determined whether or not a demo start command has been received. If a demo start command has been received, the demo start command is transmitted to the display control device 96. Thereby, the demonstration display is started in the symbol display device 61.

<Various Processes for Performing Various Controls Using the Imaging Results of the Imaging Substrate 71>
Next, various processes for performing various controls using the imaging results of the imaging substrate 71 will be described. Prior to describing the processing contents of various processes, an electrical configuration for executing these various processes will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration for performing various controls using the imaging result of the imaging substrate 71.

  As described above, the imaging substrate 71 includes the light emitting device 72 and the imaging device 73. The light emitting device 72 includes an LED driver 72a whose emission timing of projection light is controlled by a control circuit 74 provided on the imaging substrate 71 and an LED that can emit near infrared rays, and is driven by the LED driver 72a to project light. An LED module 72b that irradiates the LED module 72b, and a radiation angle adjustment lens 72c that is arranged on the front side of the LED module 72b in the light irradiation direction and that can adjust the radiation angle of the projection light with respect to the measurement target. I have. When a signal indicating that the projection light should be irradiated is transmitted from the sound light side MPU 93 to the imaging substrate 71, the LED driver 72a is operated based on the control of the control circuit 74, and accordingly, the LED module 72b is Infrared rays are irradiated.

  The imaging device 73 receives reflected light that is emitted from the light emitting device 72 and reflected from the measurement target, and a visible image imaging sensor 75 that detects an imaging signal using a plurality of pixels, and a distance data imaging sensor 76. The viewing angle adjusting lens 77 is arranged on the irradiation source side of the reflected light with respect to the visible image imaging sensor 75 and the distance data imaging sensor 76 and can adjust the viewing angle at which the reflected light from the measurement target is incident. And are provided. The visible image pickup sensor 75 and the distance data image pickup sensor 76 are juxtaposed at close positions, and the same or substantially the same range is the image pickup ranges IAX and IAY.

  The visible image pickup sensor 75 uses a CCD sensor, a MOS sensor, or a CMOS sensor so that a monochrome image can be acquired. The visible image capturing sensor 75 may be configured to capture a color image. Further, the visible image pickup sensor 75 includes a pixel array unit 75a having a large number of pixels (for example, 1000 pixels) in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction as light receiving units. A pixel driver unit 75b that reads signals from each pixel by scanning in the vertical direction is provided, and the signal read by the pixel driver unit 75b is A / D converted after noise cancellation processing. . The converted output signal is received by a visible image signal processing circuit 79 provided in the signal processing circuit 78, and a monochrome image is derived by the visible image signal processing circuit 79.

  As the distance data imaging sensor 76, a CCD sensor, a MOS sensor, or a CMOS sensor is used. The distance data imaging sensor 76 includes a pixel array unit 76a having a large number of pixels (for example, 1000 pixels) as a light receiving unit in each of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. A pixel driver unit 76b that scans in each direction and reads out a signal from each pixel is provided. The signal read out by the pixel driver unit 76b is A / D converted after noise cancellation processing. The converted output signal is received by the distance data signal processing circuit 80 provided in the signal processing circuit 78.

  The distance data signal processing circuit 80 derives the distance from the imaging device 73 to the measurement object by using a so-called TOF (Time of Flight) technique. Specifically, the propagation time of the light to the measurement target is calculated based on the information on the projection light emitted from the light emitting device 72 and the information on the reflected light received by the imaging device 73, and the calculation result is known. The distance from the imaging device 73 to the measurement target is derived by using the speed of light. Further, since the derivation of the distance is performed for each of a large number of pixels of the distance data imaging sensor 76, the distance to the measurement target can be derived for each pixel.

  The imaging substrate 71 having the above configuration receives the signal from the sound light side MPU 93 and irradiates the projection light from the light emitting device 72 and derives the visible image data and the distance data using the imaging result in the imaging device 73. Do. Specifically, the sound light side MPU 93 transmits a signal to the imaging substrate 71 at a predetermined timing based on a command received from the main side MPU 83 to irradiate projection light, derive visible image data, and derive distance data. Let it be done.

  Visible image data and distance data acquired in the imaging substrate 71 based on an instruction from the sound light side MPU 93 are transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. When the visible image data and the distance data are transmitted, address data indicating which pixel in the pixel array units 75a and 76a corresponds to the visible image data and the distance data is also transmitted. The visible image data is written in a visible image storage area 95a provided in the sound light side RAM 95, and the distance data is written in a distance data storage area 95b provided in the sound light side RAM 95. In this case, the visible image storage area 95a and the distance data storage area 95b are provided with unit storage areas in a one-to-one correspondence with the large number of pixels provided in the pixel array portions 75a and 76a. The visible image data and the distance data transmitted from the substrate 71 are individually written in the unit storage areas corresponding to the pixels for which the visible image data and the distance data can be derived.

  The sound light side MPU 93 uses the visible image data written in the visible image storage area 95a and the distance data written in the distance data storage area 95b for each distance of the individual images included in the image for one frame. Instead, it is possible to recognize a player's hand, finger, face and body, and to recognize the shape and size of the hand, finger, face and body. An image for one frame means that all the pixels of the pixel array units 75a and 76a in the image pickup device 73 have received the reflected light in response to a single projection light irradiation command issued to the light emitting device 72. It is an image derived based on what has been done. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to acquire distance data for each unit data, which is the minimum unit for determining color information in the visible image, and to recognize the visible image as a three-dimensional image.

<Imaging control processing>
Next, the imaging control process executed in step S507 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the sound light side MPU 93 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing imaging control processing executed by the sound light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the reception standby flag provided in the sound side RAM 95. The reception standby flag is used to specify whether or not the sound light side MPU 93 is in a state of waiting for acquisition of visible image data and distance data after the projection light is emitted from the light emitting device 72. Flag.

  If a negative determination is made in step S701, an irradiation instruction signal is transmitted to the control circuit 74 of the imaging substrate 71 in step S702. Thereby, the projection light is emitted from the light emitting device 72. In subsequent step S703, "1" is set to the reception standby flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95.

  Here, the signal processing executed by the signal processing circuit 78 will be described with reference to FIG. The signal processing circuit 78 includes a CPU (not shown) that controls the signal processing circuit 78, a ROM (not shown) that stores various control programs executed by the CPU and fixed value data, and a control stored in the ROM. A RAM (not shown), which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the program is executed, is mounted. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing signal processing executed by the signal processing circuit 78.

  First, in step S801, it is determined whether an imaging signal transmitted from the imaging device 73 has been received. If the determination in step S801 is affirmative, in step S802, the visible image signal processing circuit 79 performs image processing using the imaging signal received in step S801 to derive visible image data. Since the visible image data is derived for each of a large number of pixels, the visible image data for each pixel can be derived. In step S802, the distance data signal processing circuit 80 derives distance data using the imaging signal received in step S801. Since the distance data is derived for each of a large number of pixels, the distance data for each pixel can be derived.

  In step S803, the visible image data and the distance data are transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. When transmitting the visible image data and the distance data, address data corresponding to the pixels of the pixel array units 75a and 76a that have received the current imaging signal is transmitted. Thereby, the sound light side MPU 93 writes the received visible image data in the unit storage area corresponding to the address data transmitted along with the visible image data in the visible image storage area 95a. Furthermore, the sound light side MPU 93 writes the received distance data in the unit storage area corresponding to the address data transmitted along with the distance data in the distance data storage area 95b.

  In a succeeding step S804, it is determined whether or not the imaging is completed. Specifically, when an imaging allowable period (for example, 6 msec) has elapsed since the projection light is emitted from the light emitting device 72, or when imaging signals are received from all the pixels of the pixel array units 75a and 76a, Based on this, it is determined whether the visible image data and the distance data are transmitted. When an affirmative determination is made in step S804, an imaging completion signal is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 in step S805.

  Returning to the description of the imaging control process (FIG. 18), when an affirmative determination is made in step S701, it is determined in step S704 whether or not imaging has been completed for the current imaging command on the imaging substrate 71. The sound light side MPU 93 determines that imaging has been completed when the imaging completion signal is received from the visible image signal processing circuit 79 and the distance data signal processing circuit 80. If an affirmative determination is made in step S704, the reception standby flag provided in the sound side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S705.

<Preliminary notice and reach in this pachinko machine 10>
In the pachinko machine 10, an event that is noticed by the player is specified using the imaging result on the imaging board 71, and the execution mode of the effect is set to a mode corresponding to the specification result. Specifically, the events that the player pays attention to include a game history display unit 200, a nail 59 provided on the game board 51, a booklet explaining the game contents of the pachinko machine 10, a symbol display device 61, a movable object unit 38 and movable combination items 39a, 39b, and 39c exist. And before the start of the game in the pachinko machine 10, and after each start, the event that the player is paying attention to among the above-mentioned events is specified using the imaging result on the imaging board 71, and the specified result is The execution mode of the production according to the corresponding attention type is set. Here, an example of the effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described prior to the identification of the attention type and the description of the execution mode of the effect corresponding to each attention type.

  First, the contents of the message notice will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the message notice.

  As shown in FIG. 20, there are a normal system, a healing system, a Zen question-and-answer system, and a tutorial system for message notice. A normal message notice is a notice as shown in FIG. 20 (a), a healing message notice is a notice as shown in FIG. 20 (b), and a Zen question and answer message notice is shown in FIG. 20 (c). The tutorial-type message notice is a notice as shown in FIG. 20 (d). In addition, it is set so that when the message notice occurs, the occurrence of the reach effect and the jackpot result are more frequent than when the message notice does not occur. In other words, the occurrence of the message advance notice increases the expectation level of reach and the expectation value of jackpots, and can enhance the player's sense of excitement.

  Next, the reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the reach effect can occur in both cases where the jackpot is not won and when the jackpot is won. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a normal-type reach production, FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an apology-type reach production, and FIG. 23 is an explanation for explaining a hit-type reach production. FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the reach effect of the intense heat system.

  In the normal reach production, as shown in FIG. 21 (a), reach first occurs, and then, as shown in FIGS. 21 (b) and 21 (c), the jellyfish production is generated next to the bubble production. Increase expectations of player jackpots. In this case, since the result of the success / failure determination process is a game turn that results in a loss, the combination of the same symbols is not finally stopped and displayed on one line as shown in FIG.

  Next, in the apology-type reach production, as shown in FIG. 22 (a), reach is first generated, and as shown in FIG. 22 (b), there is an effect that increases the player's expectation for the jackpot, such as a bubble production. It occurs, but it comes off. After the change symbol stops, the character is displayed at the center of the symbol display device 61 as shown in FIG. 22 (c), and an effect of sitting on the ground toward the player is generated as shown in FIG. 22 (d). . In this way, the production corresponding to the apology for having missed the player's expectation is performed.

  Next, in the reach-type reach production, as shown in FIG. 23 (a), after the reach has occurred, in FIG. 23 (b) to FIG. 23 (g), it is used to ask whether or not the player is hit. A display effect is executed. In this case, in FIG. 23 (b) to FIG. 23 (f), an effect is generated in which a blackout is performed and only the characters are struck, and in FIG. As shown in FIG.

  Next, in the intense heat type reach production, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), after the reach has occurred, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), the production button 40 is displayed in the center of the symbol display device 61. An effect that prompts the user to press the effect button 40 is generated. When the effect button 40 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 24C, the character's face is displayed in full on the symbol display device 61, and characters such as “Burning” and “Intense heat” Is displayed. Since the game result is a game result in which the result of the success / failure determination process is a losing result, the combination of the same symbols is not finally stopped and displayed on one line as shown in FIG.

  Next, the gaming state notification will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal gaming state notification, FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the prior gaming state notification, and FIG. 27 is for explaining the promoted gaming state notification. It is explanatory drawing.

  In the normal game state notification, in the game times corresponding to the most advantageous jackpot result, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), the fluctuation starts first, and as shown in FIG. When various reach effects are generated and the most advantageous jackpot is reached as shown in FIG. 25C, the player is notified of the most advantageous jackpot result as shown in FIG. 25D.

  Next, prior notice means that in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result, as shown in FIG. 26 (a), the fluctuation starts first and is displayed on the symbol display device 61 as shown in FIG. 26 (b). The changed symbol disappears, and only the “big hit” character is displayed in the center of the symbol display device 61. In other words, the player is notified that the current game result is a big hit before the fluctuation stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), the final stop result is also a big hit, and as shown in FIG. 26 (d), the player is notified of the big hit.

  Next, in the game times corresponding to the most advantageous jackpot result, promotion is a jackpot with even symbols as shown in FIG. 27 (a), and on the symbol display device 61 as shown in FIG. 27 (b). The player is notified of the jackpot with an even number of symbols. Then, as shown in FIG. 27C, an instruction to press the effect button 40 is generated on the symbol display device 61 during the jackpot digestion round. As shown in FIG. 27 (d), when the effect button 40 is pressed, an effect that promotes to the most advantageous jackpot result occurs.

<A player's attention type set at the start of a game or after a specified number of revolutions>
Next, the attention type set before the start of the game in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the feature of the attention type set at the start of the game.

  As shown in FIG. 28, there are five attention types set before the game starts. Specifically, there are five types: a throwing type, an amateur type, a professional type, a suspicion type, and a normal type. Before the start of the game, the player is assigned to one of the five attention types. Moreover, the frequency of occurrence of various effects generated during the game is different for each of the noted types. However, even if the frequency of occurrence of various effects differs for each type of attention, there is no difference in the degree of jackpot expectation. In other words, the jackpot expectation is the same regardless of which attention type is set. In addition, the period in which the feature for each attention type is reflected is 30 rotations (specified rotation speed) from the start of the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the period in which the feature for each attention type is reflected may be more or less than 30 rotations after the game is started. Specific features of the production for each attention type will be described below.

  In the case of the normal type, various effects occur in a well-balanced manner with respect to message notices, reach effects, and game state notifications. The throwing type is characterized by many comfort patterns overall. Specifically, the content of the message notice has a high frequency of healing. Further, the reach production has a high frequency of apology, and the notification of the gaming state has a high frequency of prior notification.

  In the case of an amateur type, the feature is that the frequency of occurrence of a tutorial effect or an intense heat effect that informs the player of game contents is high. Specifically, the content of the message notice has a high frequency of tutorial effects. Further, the notification of the gaming state has a high occurrence frequency of a normal notification, and the reach production has a high occurrence frequency of the intense heat system.

  The professional type is characterized by a lot of concise production. Specifically, the occurrence frequency of the message notice is low. Further, the reach production has a high occurrence frequency of the normal system, and the notification of the game state has a high occurrence frequency of the prior notice.

  In the case of the suspicion type, the feature is that there are many promotion effects overall. Specifically, the content of the message notice has a high incidence of Zen questions and answers. Further, the reach production has a high occurrence frequency of the hit system, and the notification of the gaming state has a high occurrence frequency of promotion to the most advantageous jackpot. In this way, by increasing the frequency of the production corresponding to the attention type, the production corresponding to the feature of the attention type is likely to occur, thereby allowing the player to play for a long time without getting bored. .

<Type table and data table>
Next, the lottery table read in step S603 of the main command handling process (FIG. 15) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a type table in a normal type.

  First, the normal type table will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal type table, command types and lottery tables are set in a one-to-one correspondence. Here, when the attention type of the player is specified, the type table corresponding to the attention type is read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95. In step S603 of the main-side command handling process (FIG. 15), the lottery table corresponding to the type of command transmitted from the main-side MPU 83 is referred to the sound-side RAM 95 with reference to the type table read to the sound-side RAM 95. read out. Also, in the case of the attention type other than the normal type, the type of command and the lottery table are set in a one-to-one correspondence as in the normal type. However, the contents of a notice lottery table, a reach production lottery table, and a game state notification lottery table, which will be described later, provided in the lottery table are different. Specifically, the values of the counters provided in each table are different for each type of attention. That is, the counter value is set in accordance with the feature of the attention type shown in FIG.

  Next, the lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 (b) to 29 (c). Here, the normal system first outreach reach lottery table will be described as an example. As shown in FIGS. 29 (b) to 29 (c), the normal first first reach reach lottery table is provided with a notice lottery table and a reach effect lottery table. First, the notice lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the notice lottery table in the normal system first outreach lottery table.

  As shown in FIG. 29B, in the notice lottery table, the numerical range of the notice counter RN and the notice contents are set in a one-to-one correspondence. Further, the distribution of the numerical range of the notice counter RN and the notice contents is different for each attention type. The content of the advance notice is determined by referring to the lottery table specified in step S603 of the main-side command handling process (FIG. 15) and referring to the value of the advance notice counter RN in the process of step S604.

  The value of the notice counter RN and the notice contents are associated with each other when the notice counter RN is “0 to 19” and there is no notice, and the notice counter RN is “20 to 39” and the message notice is used for the normal system and notice counter. Message notification healing with RN value "40-59", message counter RN value "60-79", message warning Zen question and answer system, message counter RN value "80-99" Become a system. The size of the numerical range of the notice counter RN corresponding to each notice effect in the normal type is set to be the same. This is because a normal type player is not particularly particular about each notice effect, and wants to see each notice effect in a balanced manner. Therefore, by generating each notice effect in a balanced manner rather than biasing the occurrence frequency of each notice effect, it is possible to concentrate the normal type player on the game without getting bored. The notice counter RN is provided in the lottery counter area of the sound light side RAM 95. The notice counter RN is a loop counter that is updated at short time intervals, adds “1” to the previous value each time the update is performed, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value “99”.

  Here, although not shown in the figure, the distribution of the notice content corresponding to the value of the notice counter RN in the attention type other than the normal type will be described. First, in the case of the throwing type, the value of the notice counter RN and the notice contents are associated with each other when the notice counter RN value is “0-9” and there is no notice, and the notice counter RN value is “10-19”. Normal system, the value of the notice counter RN is “20 to 79”, the healing system of the message notice, the value of the notice counter RN is “80 to 89”, the Zen question and answer system of the message notice, and the value of the notice counter RN is “90 to 99” "It becomes a tutorial system of message notice. That is, it is set so that the occurrence frequency of the healing system in the message notice is higher than that of the normal type. Here, the throwing type player sits on the chair arranged in front of the pachinko machine 10 and starts the game without staring at the many nails 59 provided on the game history display unit 200 and the game board 51. From this point, it may be frustrated before the game starts. Therefore, it is preferable to heal the player's feelings by increasing the frequency of occurrence of the healing system in the message notice. Thereby, it is possible to give the player the energy to continue the game.

  In the case of the amateur type, the notice counter RN is associated with the notice contents by the notice counter RN having a value of “0 to 19”, no notice, and the notice counter RN having a value of “20 to 29”. Normal system, the value of the notice counter RN is “30 to 39”, the message notice healing system, the value of the notice counter RN “40 to 49” is the Zen question and answer system of the message notice, and the value of the notice counter RN is “50 to 99” "It becomes a tutorial system of message notice. That is, it is set so that the frequency of occurrence of the tutorial system in the message notice is higher than that of the normal type. Here, there is a possibility that the amateur type player does not know anything about the game contents of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chance of explaining the game contents of the pachinko machine 10 by increasing the frequency of occurrence of the tutorial system in the message notice. As a result, the player can be interested in the pachinko machine 10 and the game can be continued for a long time.

  Further, in the case of a professional type, the value of the notice counter RN and the notice contents are associated with the notice notice when the notice counter RN value is “0 to 59” and no notice is given, and the notice counter RN value is “60 to 69”. Normal system, the value of the notice counter RN is “70 to 79”, the message notice healing system, the value of the notice counter RN is “80 to 89”, the Zen question and answer system of the message notice, and the value of the notice counter RN is “90 to 99” "Will be a tutorial notice of the message notice. That is, the frequency of occurrence of message notice is set lower than that of the normal type. Therefore, when the message notice occurs, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the message notice does not occur. Here, the professional type player is interested only in the result of the success / failure and not interested in the content of the notice effect. Moreover, if the notice effect is frequently generated, the player may accumulate stress and stop the game. Therefore, by increasing the distribution of the numerical range of the notice counter RN corresponding to no notice in the game times that are the result of losing, the player's stress is prevented from accumulating and the game can be continued for a long time. Is possible.

  In the case of the suspicion type, the correspondence between the value of the notice counter RN and the notice contents is a message when the value of the notice counter RN is “0 to 19”, no notice, and the value of the notice counter RN is “20 to 29”. Normal system of the notice, the value of the notice counter RN is “30 to 39”, the healing system of the message notice, the value of the notice counter RN is “40 to 89”, the Zen question and answer system of the message notice, and the value of the notice counter RN is “90” 99 ”will be a tutorial notice of message notice. That is, it is set so that the frequency of occurrence of Zen questions and answers in the message notice is higher than that of the normal type. Here, the suspicion-type player wants to feel as long as possible the expectation that the result will be a big hit. Further, the contents of the Zen question and answer system in the message notice are not contents that directly lead to the jackpot result as shown in FIG. Further, the content of message A and the content of message B are not engaged. Further, as shown in FIGS. 20A, 20B, and 20D, in the message notice other than the Zen question and answer system, the contents of the message A and the contents of the message B are engaged. Here, in this embodiment, when a Zen question-and-answer message notice occurs, and then reach production occurs, the probability of winning a jackpot increases. In other words, the expectation that the jackpot result will change depending on whether or not the Zen question and answer message notice will occur, and then the reach production will occur, so the expectation that the success or failure result will be a jackpot result when the Zen question and answer message notice occurs A feeling can be given to a suspicious assassin type player. Therefore, by increasing the frequency of occurrence of Zen question and answer system in the message notice, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the result of this game round will be a big hit result. This makes it possible to attract suspicion-type players to the game.

  Next, the reach effect lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the reach production lottery table in the normal system first outreach lottery table.

  As shown in FIG. 29C, in the reach effect lottery table, the numerical range of the reach effect counter RD and the content of the reach effect are set in a one-to-one correspondence. In addition, the distribution of the numerical range of the reach effect counter RD and the content of the reach effect is different for each attention type. The contents of the reach effect are determined by referring to the lottery table set for each attention type and referring to the value of the reach effect counter RD. The contents of the reach effect are determined by referring to the lottery table specified in step S603 of the main-side command handling process (FIG. 15) and referring to the value of the reach effect counter RD in the process of step S606.

  The value of the reach effect counter RD is associated with the content of the reach effect. The value of the reach effect counter RD is “0 to 32”. The effect of the system and the reach effect counter RD are “66 to 98”, and the value of the normal effect and the reach effect counter RD is “99”. Here, the normal type player is not particular about each reach production, and wants to see each reach production in a balanced manner. Therefore, by generating each reach effect in a balanced manner rather than biasing the occurrence frequency of each reach effect, it becomes possible to concentrate the normal type player on the game without getting bored. However, the occurrence frequency of intense heat system reach production is set low. This is because the direct heat reach production can be expected to be a big hit. The reason why the heat-reaching reach production is expected to be a big hit will be described later. The reach effect counter RD is provided in the lottery counter area of the sound light side RAM 95. In addition, the reach effect counter RD is a loop counter that is updated at short time intervals, adds “1” to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value “99”.

  Here, although not shown, the distribution of the contents of the reach effect corresponding to the value of the reach effect counter RD in the attention type other than the normal type will be described. First, in the case of a throwing type, the value of the reach effect counter RD is associated with the reach effect, the value of the reach effect counter RD is “0 to 49”, the apology effect, and the value of the reach effect counter RD is “50 to “59” is the production effect, the reach effect counter RD is “60 to 98”, the normal effect, and the reach effect counter RD is “99”, which is a very hot effect. That is, the frequency of apology is set higher than that of the normal type. Here, as described above, the throwing-type player sits on the chair arranged in front of the pachinko machine 10 without staring at the large number of nails 59 provided on the game history display unit 200 or the game board 51. However, from the point of starting the game, there is a possibility of being frustrated before the game starts. Therefore, it is preferable to heal the player's feelings by increasing the occurrence frequency of the healing system in the reach production. Thereby, it is possible to give the player the energy to continue the game.

  Further, in the case of an amateur type, the value of the reach effect counter RD is associated with the reach effect. “59” is the production effect, the reach effect counter RD is “60 to 89”, the normal effect, and the reach effect counter RD is “90 to 99”, which is an intense heat effect. That is, it is set so that the occurrence frequency of the intense heat system is higher than that of the normal type. Here, even if an amateur-type player results in a disapproval result, it can be excited if a reach effect that can be expected of the jackpot result occurs. Therefore, it is possible to continue the game for a long time without getting bored by increasing the frequency of occurrence of the intense heat reach production that can be expected for the jackpot result.

  In the case of a professional type, the value of the reach effect counter RD is associated with the reach effect by setting the reach effect counter RD to “0 to 19”, the apology effect, and the reach effect counter RD being “20 to “29” is a production effect, a reach effect counter RD is “30 to 98”, a normal effect, and a reach effect counter RD is “99”, which is an intense heat effect. That is, the occurrence frequency of the normal system is set higher than that of the normal type. Here, as described above, since the professional type player is interested only in the result, the contents of the reach effect are not interested. In addition, if characteristic reach effects such as an apology system, a hit system, and an intense heat system are frequently generated, the player may accumulate stress and stop the game. In particular, if a pro-type player who is not interested in the success / failure result is told that the success / failure result is a jackpot result, the pro-type player may be stressed. Therefore, by increasing the frequency of ordinary reach production, which is not very characteristic, and lowering the frequency of roaring reach production, it is possible to suppress the accumulation of stress on professional type players and to play games for a long time. It is possible to make it continue.

  Further, in the case of the suspicion type, the correspondence between the reach effect counter RD and the reach effect is such that the reach effect counter RD is “0-19” and the apology effect and reach effect counter RD is “20”. ~ 79 ", the production effect of reach, the reach effect counter RD is" 80-98 ", the normal effect, and the reach effect counter RD is" 99 ", the heat effect. That is, it is set so that the frequency of occurrence of the beat system is higher than that of the normal type. Here, as described above, the suspicion-type player wants to feel as long as possible the expectation that the success / failure result is a jackpot result. As shown in FIG. 23, in the hit-type reach production, the production that expects the jackpot result is continuously generated. In other words, the suspicious assassin type player can be thrilled and enjoyed whether or not this game round is a big hit result. Therefore, it is possible to attract a suspicious assassin type player to a game by increasing the frequency of occurrence of a roaring reach effect.

  Next, the lottery table in the case where the winning result is the jackpot result will be described using the normal system first jackpot reach lottery table as an example. However, the frequency of occurrence of each notice effect and each reach effect when the success / failure result is a jackpot result is the same for all attention types.

  First, the value of the notice counter RN and the notice contents are associated with each other when the notice counter RN is “0 to 7” and no notice is given, and when the notice counter RN is “8 to 30” and the message notice is given as a normal notice or notice. The counter RN value is "31-53" and the message notice healing system, the notice counter RN value is "54 to 76" and the message notice Zen question and answer system, the notice counter RN value is "77 to 99" and the message notice notification It becomes a tutorial system. Here, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the success / failure result is a jackpot result if some notice effect is generated. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's feeling of uplift by increasing the frequency of occurrence of each notice effect.

  Next, associating the value of the reach effect counter RD with the content of the reach effect is such that the value of the reach effect counter RD is “0 to 4” and the value of the reach effect counter RD is “5 to 9”. Thus, the production effect of reach and the reach effect counter RD is “10 to 14”, the effect of the normal effect, and the value of the reach effect counter RD is “15 to 99”, which is an intense heat effect. Here, when the success / failure result is a jackpot result, the occurrence frequency of the intense heat reach effect is set to be high. More specifically, about 90% of the big hits will generate intense heat reach. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the result is an outlier, the frequency of occurrence of each reach effect is different for each attention type. Specifically, if the result is a failure result, in the normal type, the throwing type, the professional type, and the suspicion type, the reach effect counter RD is “99” and the intense heat effect is selected. . In the case of an amateur type, the reach effect counter RD has a value of “90 to 99”, and the intense heat reach effect is selected. As described above, when the success / failure result is a jackpot result, the reach effect counter RD is “15 to 99” and the intense heat reach effect is selected.

  Here, for example, it is assumed that reach effect occurs 100 times. Further, it is assumed that 10 out of 100 reach performances are jackpot results, and the remaining 90 times are miss results. In this case, of the 10 jackpot results, the number of times the intense heat reach effect is generated is about 9 times. In addition, among the 90 outliers, the number of times that the intense heat reach effect is generated is about 9 at most. In other words, when an intense heat reach production occurs, a jackpot result is obtained with a probability of about 50%. Therefore, since there is a possibility that a jackpot result will be generated when an intense heat-based reach production occurs, it can be said that the intense-heat-type reach production can be expected for the jackpot result. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that it is highly likely that the success / failure result will be a big hit result by increasing the occurrence frequency of the intense heat reach effect, and it is possible to give the player a sense of security. It becomes.

  Moreover, in the display continuation time in which the reach effect occurs, not only the result of the success / failure, but it is possible to generate the intense heat reach effect regardless of which display duration time is selected. In the present embodiment, the display duration is selected in the main MPU 83, and the reach effect is selected in the sound light MPU 93. Here, when the success / failure result is a jackpot result, if only a long display duration is selected in the display duration in which the reach effect occurs, the display duration in the short display duration in which the reach effect occurs is severe. Even if a thermal reach production occurs, it is not possible to expect a jackpot result. In other words, it can no longer be said that the intense heat-based reach production is a reach production that can be expected from the jackpot result. In this regard, according to the present configuration, when the result is a jackpot result, there is a possibility that a short display continuation time is selected from among the display continuation times when the reach effect occurs. Therefore, it is possible to expect the jackpot result for the intense heat type reach effect that occurs in the short display duration of the display duration in which the reach effect occurs. In addition, the display duration in which the reach effect occurs is not limited to the result of the success / failure, and any display duration time can be selected to generate an extremely hot reach effect. It is possible to adapt even if the generation frequency of the system reach production is different.

  Next, the gaming state notification table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29D is an explanatory diagram for explaining a gaming state notification table in the normal first big hit reach lottery table. Here, the gaming state notification table is provided only in the lottery table in which the winning / failing result is a jackpot result. This is because the effect of notifying the game state is an effect that occurs only when the game result is a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (d), in the gaming state notification table, the numerical range of the gaming state notification counter RG and the content of notification of the gaming state are set in a one-to-one correspondence. Further, the distribution of the numerical range of the gaming state notification counter RG and the content of the gaming state notification is different for each attention type. The content of the game state notification is determined by referring to the lottery table specified in step S603 of the main-side command response process (FIG. 15) and referring to the value of the game state notification counter RG in the process of step S606. The

  The association between the value of the gaming state notification counter RG and the content of the gaming state notification becomes normal notification when the value of the gaming state notification counter RG is “0 to 33”, and the value of the gaming state notification counter RG is “34”. ˜66 ”is an advance notice, and a gaming state notice counter RG is“ 67 to 99 ”, which is a promotion notice. The size of the numerical value range of the gaming state notification counter RG in the normal type is set to be the same. This is because a normal-type player is not particularly particular about the contents of the game state notification and wants to watch in a balanced manner. Therefore, it is possible to concentrate a normal type player on the game without getting bored by generating the game state notification in a balanced manner rather than biasing the occurrence frequency of the game state notification content. The gaming state notification counter RG is provided in the lottery counter area of the sound light side RAM 95. Also, the gaming state notification counter RG is updated at short time intervals, and each time it is updated, “1” is added to the previous value, and after reaching the maximum value “99”, it is a loop counter that returns to “0”. .

  Here, although not shown, the distribution of the contents of the game state notification corresponding to the value of the game state notification counter RG in the attention type other than the normal type will be described. First, in the case of the throwing type, the association between the value of the gaming state notification counter RG and the content of the gaming state notification becomes normal notification when the value of the gaming state notification counter RG is “0 to 19”, and the gaming state notification counter When the value of RG is “20 to 79”, the advance notice is notified, and when the value of the gaming state notification counter RG is “80 to 99”, the advance is notified. That is, it is set so that the occurrence frequency of prior notification is higher than that of the normal type. Here, as described above, the throwing-type player sits on the chair arranged in front of the pachinko machine 10 without staring at the large number of nails 59 provided on the game history display unit 200 or the game board 51. However, from the point of starting the game, there is a possibility of being frustrated before the game starts. Then, when a reach production that can be expected from the jackpot result occurs when the feeling is tattered, the desire to know whether or not the jackpot result is faster than the desire to enjoy the reach production becomes stronger. Therefore, by increasing the occurrence frequency of the prior notice, it is possible to promptly notify the throwing-type player of the success / failure result and to prevent the player's irritation from being accumulated. Thereby, it is possible to give the player the energy to continue the game.

  In the case of an amateur type, the association between the value of the gaming state notification counter RG and the content of the gaming state notification becomes normal notification when the value of the gaming state notification counter RG is “0 to 79”, and the gaming state notification counter When the value of RG is “80 to 89”, the advance notice is notified, and when the value of the gaming state notification counter RG is “90 to 99”, the advance is notified. That is, it is set so that the occurrence frequency of normal notification is higher than that of the normal type. Here, as described above, since an amateur type player may not know anything about the game contents of the pachinko machine 10, it is common for amateur type players to perform general normal notifications. It is preferable to learn the contents of notification of a big jackpot result. In addition, if an advance notification or promotion notification is generated, an amateur-type player who does not know anything about the game contents may be confused. Therefore, by increasing the occurrence frequency of normal notification, it is possible to notify the result of the determination easily and easily without confusion for an amateur type player.

  In the case of a professional type, the association between the value of the gaming state notification counter RG and the content of the gaming state notification becomes normal notification when the value of the gaming state notification counter RG is “0 to 19”, and the gaming state notification counter When the value of RG is “20 to 89”, the advance notice is notified, and when the value of the gaming state notification counter RG is “90 to 99”, the advance is notified. That is, it is set so that the occurrence frequency of prior notification is higher than that of the normal type. Here, as described above, since the professional player is interested only in the result of the success / failure, it is preferable to promptly notify the player of the result of the success / failure by increasing the occurrence frequency of the advance notice. Thereby, it becomes possible to suppress that a player's stress accumulates.

  Further, in the case of the suspicion type, the association between the value of the gaming state notification counter RG and the content of the gaming state notification becomes normal notification when the value of the gaming state notification counter RG is “0 to 19”, and the gaming state notification When the value of the counter RG is “20 to 39”, the advance notice is notified, and when the value of the gaming state notification counter RG is “40 to 99”, the advance is notified. That is, the frequency of promotion is set higher than that of the normal type. As shown in FIG. 27, the promotion is a notification effect of a gaming state in which, in the game round that results in the most advantageous jackpot result, the jackpot is first made with an even number of symbols and the transition to the most advantageous jackpot result occurs during the jackpot round. is there. Here, as described above, since the suspicious assassin type player likes to throb, it is possible to entertain the suspicious assassin type player by increasing the occurrence frequency of promotion. This makes it possible to continue the game for a long time without getting bored.

  Next, the contents of reading the data table corresponding to the lottery result from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a data table corresponding to the content of the notice, the content of reach, the content of game state notification, the stop result, and the display duration time.

  The combination of the notice effect, the reach effect, the game state notification information, the stop result and the display duration time, and the data table are set in a one-to-one correspondence. Information on notice effect, information on reach effect and information on game status obtained from lottery results of various counters provided in the various tables, and the stop specified in step S605 of the main-side command response process (FIG. 15). A data table corresponding to the symbol information and the display duration information specified in step S606 of the main command corresponding process (FIG. 15) is read from the sound side ROM 94 to the sound side RAM 95 in step S608. .

<Display duration for notice and reach effects>
As described above, the lottery process for the notice effect and the lottery process for the reach effect are executed in a manner corresponding to the type of the notice type, so that the execution manner of the notice effect and the execution manner of the reach effect are changed corresponding to the notice type. It becomes possible to make it. In this case, when the notice effect and the reach effect are executed as described above, the execution manner of the notice effect differs from the predetermined change command and type command transmitted from the main MPU 83 to the sound light MPU 93. In addition, the execution mode of reach production may be different. However, even if the execution mode of the notice effect is different from the execution mode of the reach effect in this way, the display duration of the game times is a time corresponding to the types of the variation command and the type command. It will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 31 that the display duration time determined by the main MPU 83 is not changed by the execution mode of the notice effect and the execution mode of the reach effect. FIG. 31 (a) shows one game time, FIG. 31 (b) shows a case where a message notice occurs and the reach effect is an apology, and FIG. 31 (c) shows a message notice occurs and the reach effect is shown. FIG. 31 (d) shows a case where a message notice is generated and the reach effect is a normal system, and FIG. 31 (e) shows a message notice occurs and the reach effect is an extremely hot system. FIG. 31 (f) shows a case where a message notice is not generated and the reach effect is an apology system.

  First, at the timing of t1, the fluctuation starts as shown in FIG. Then, at the timing of t2, the notice effect starts as shown in FIGS. 31 (b) to 31 (e). Specifically, a message as shown in FIG. 20 is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 31 (f), when the notice effect is not generated, the message notice is not generated on the symbol display device 61 at the timing t2. Next, at the timing of t3, the message notice is finished as shown in FIGS. Then, at the timing of t4, a reach effect occurs as shown in FIGS. 31 (b) to 31 (f). Specifically, reach effects as shown in FIGS. 21 to 24 occur. Then, at the timing of t5, the variation ends as shown in FIGS.

  In this way, the display duration determined by the main MPU 83 is not changed by the execution mode of the notice effect and the execution mode of the reach effect. However, this is limited to the case where the same display duration is compared.

<Method of identifying attention type>
Here, in order to specify the attention type described above, it is necessary to specify where the player is looking. Specifically, it is necessary to specify the height position of the player's face, the orientation of the player's face, and the direction of the line of sight.

  First, a method for specifying the height position of the player's face will be described. First, the visible image data for one frame is grasped based on the visible image data stored in the visible image storage area 95a of the sound side RAM 95, and the visible image corresponding to the human face portion in the grasped visible image data. Specify whether image data exists. When specifying the person's face, a range corresponding to the contour portion of the face corresponding to an elliptical shape or a circular shape is extracted, and there is a range corresponding to the eyes, nose, mouth or ear in the extracted range. If it is, the extracted range is recognized as a face. Then, by grasping the distance data stored in the distance data storage area 95b of the sound light side RAM 95, the height position of the face is grasped.

  Next, when specifying the orientation of the player's face, first, the position of the forehead and the position of the chin that exist within the range recognized as the face are specified. Specifically, referring to the visible image data for one frame, the range corresponding to the forehead and the chin is extracted, and the distance corresponding to the forehead and the chin stored in the distance data storage area 95b of the sound side RAM 95. Extract data. If the forehead distance data is larger than the jaw distance data, the player's face is identified as facing upward, and if the forehead distance data is smaller than the jaw distance data, Specify that the player's face is facing down. Further, when the distance data on the forehead and the distance data on the chin are the same, it is specified that the player's face is facing the front.

  Next, a method for detecting the direction of the line of sight will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a method of specifying the direction of the line of sight.

  First, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), it was generated by irradiating near infrared rays from the pupil 300a, the upper eye lid 300b, the lower eye lid 300c, and the LED module 72b existing in the player's eye 300. The player's line of sight is detected using the reference point 300d which is the position of the reflected light on the cornea. The LED module 72b has an LED capable of emitting near infrared rays as described above, and is driven by the LED driver 72a to project near infrared rays.

  Specifically, the pupil 300a is first detected from the shape of the contour and the brightness of the peripheral portion with reference to the range corresponding to the eye. Next, the position of the reference point 300d, which is the position on the cornea of the reflected light generated by irradiating near infrared rays from the LED module 72b, is detected. Specifically, the reference point 300d is detected by performing edge detection with reference to a range corresponding to the eyes. Here, if the pupil 300a is closer to the upper lid b than the reference point 300d, the player's line of sight is facing upward, and the pupil 300a is closer to the lower eyelid c than the reference point 300d. In this case, the player's line of sight is facing downward. Further, when the reference point 300d and the pupil 300a overlap, the player's line of sight is facing the front.

  Next, an object viewed by players before and after sitting will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 (b), (c) and FIG. FIG. 32 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the direction of the line of sight before sitting, FIG. 32 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the direction of the line of sight after sitting, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the target object seen.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the line of sight of the player before sitting is divided into a downward line of sight R1 looking at the pachinko machine 10 side, and a front to upward line of sight R2 looking at the game history display unit 200 side. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the direction of the player's line of sight is based on the nail installation range RA1 in which a number of nails 59 provided on the game board 51 are installed, and the game from the previous opening / closing execution mode. It is distinguished from the game history confirmation range RA2 in which the game history display unit 200 in which the number of times of execution, the number of times of execution of the opening / closing execution mode, the number of balls that have been played since the opening of the game hall, and the like are displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32C, the player's line of sight after sitting is distinguished into a front-to-up line of sight R3 looking at the pachinko machine 10 side and a downward line of sight R4 looking at the player's hand. . More specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the direction of the player's line of sight is such that the nail installation range RA1 in which a large number of nails 59 provided on the game board 51 are installed and the player's line of sight are on the lower side. This is distinguished from the booklet confirmation range RA3 that is facing and viewing the booklet. The booklet confirmation range RA3 is set lower than the nail installation range RA1 because the player often checks the booklet by placing it on the lower side of the game board 51 or holding it in his hand. Has been. The booklet is a small book with a small number of pages on which explanations of various effects relating to the pachinko machine 10, a game flow, and the like are written as described above.

<Various processes for setting the attention type>
The attention type at the start of the game is set by identifying the player's face position, face orientation, and line of sight before and after sitting on a chair installed in the pachinko machine 10. Hereinafter, various processes for setting the attention type will be described in detail.

<Pre-seating judgment process>
First, the pre-seating determination process executed in step S508 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the sound light side MPU 93 will be described with reference to FIG. The pre-seating determination process identifies an event that the player is paying attention to before sitting on the chair installed in front of the pachinko machine 10, and performs an effect corresponding to the attention type corresponding to the identification result. This is done to set the execution mode. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the pre-seating determination process executed by the sound light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S901, the visible image data for one frame stored in the visible image storage area 95a provided in the sound side RAM 95 and the distance data stored in the distance data storage area 95b are used in the pre-seating determination process. It is determined whether it is the timing to use. This timing is after 10 msec from the previous processing timing. Here, as described above, the imaging cycle of the imaging device 73 is 4 msec. That is, the period in which the visible image data for one frame stored in the visible image storage area 95a and the distance data stored in the distance data storage area 95b are used in the pre-seating determination process is greater than the imaging period of the imaging device 73. Therefore, the same visible image as the previously referred visible image and the same distance data as the previously referred distance data are not referred to.

  If the determination in step S901 is affirmative, the player who is not seated in the chair placed in front of the pachinko machine 10 based on the visible image data stored in the visible image storage area 95a of the sound light side RAM 95 in step S902. It is determined whether or not exists. Specifically, the visible image data for one frame is grasped based on the visible image data stored in the visible image storage area 95a of the sound side RAM 95, and the human face portion is included in the grasped visible image data. It is determined whether or not the corresponding visible image data and the visible image data corresponding to the chair portion arranged in front of the pachinko machine 10 exist. In determining the person's face, a range corresponding to the contour portion of the face corresponding to an elliptical shape or a circular shape is extracted, and there is a range corresponding to the eyes, nose, mouth or ear in the extracted range. If it is, the extracted range is recognized as a face. Then, by grasping the distance data stored in the distance data storage area 95 b of the sound light side RAM 95, the distance data from the imaging device 73 to the player's face data is specified, and the distance data is stored in the pachinko machine 10. It is determined whether or not the value is larger than the value set in the design stage.

  In determining the chair, a range corresponding to the backrest of the chair corresponding to a quadrangle or a circular shape is extracted, and a range corresponding to a seat portion of the chair corresponding to the quadrangle or the circular shape is extracted in the vicinity. If it exists, the extracted range is recognized as a chair. In other words, if the distance data of the player's face is larger than the value set in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 and there is visible image data corresponding to the chair portion, an affirmative determination is made in step S902.

  If the determination in step S902 is affirmative, the pre-seating type determination process is executed in step S903. The pre-seating type determination process will be described with reference to FIG. The pre-seating type determination process is performed to set the attention type according to the direction of the player's line of sight before sitting. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a pre-seating type determination process executed by the sound light side MPU 93.

  As shown in FIG. 35, first, in step S1001, the value of the pre-seating counter provided in the sound side RAM 95 is incremented by “1”. The pre-seat counter is used to count the time until the player appears in front of the pachinko machine 10 and sits on a chair installed in front of the pachinko machine 10. The value of the counter before sitting is incremented by “1” every predetermined time (10 msec).

  In step S1002, the height position, the face direction, and the position of the pupil 300a captured this time are grasped. Specifically, first, the visible image data for one frame is grasped based on the visible image data stored in the visible image storage area 95a of the sound side RAM 95, and the human face portion is included in the grasped visible image data. It is specified whether or not visible image data corresponding to is present. When specifying the person's face, a range corresponding to the contour portion of the face corresponding to an elliptical shape or a circular shape is extracted, and there is a range corresponding to the eyes, nose, mouth or ear in the extracted range. If it is, the extracted range is recognized as a face. Then, the height position of the face is grasped from the distance data stored in the distance data storage area 95b of the sound side RAM 95.

  Next, the direction of the player's face is specified. Specifically, the position of the forehead and the chin existing within the range recognized as the face is specified, and the forehead and the chin stored in the distance data storage area 95b of the sound side RAM 95 are handled. Extract distance data. Next, the player's line of sight is detected. Specifically, a position on the cornea (corneal reflection) of reflected light generated by irradiating near infrared rays is set as a reference point 300d, and a line of sight is detected based on the position of the pupil 300a with respect to the position of the reference point 300d.

  In subsequent step S1003, whether the player's face height position, player face direction and pupil 300a position specified in step S1002 correspond to the game history confirmation range RA2 set in the design stage. Determine whether or not. The height position of the player's face, the orientation of the player's face and the position of the pupil 300a corresponding to the game history confirmation range RA2 are set at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10.

  If the determination in step S1003 is affirmative, “1” is added to the value of the game history display continuous counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1004. The game history display continuous counter is a counter for causing the sound light side MPU 93 to grasp that the player is continuously watching the game history display unit 200. In step S1005, it is determined whether or not the addition condition of the game history display counter provided in the sound side RAM 95 is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the game history display continuous counter exceeds “50”. If the determination in step S1005 is affirmative, the value of the game history display continuous counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S1006. By providing this process, it is possible to add the value of the game history display counter at a constant interval. In the subsequent step S1007, “1” is added to the value of the game history display counter provided in the sound side RAM 95. That is, when continuously watching the game history display unit 200, the value of the game history display counter is incremented by “1” every 0.5 sec.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1003, the value of the game history display continuous counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S1008. In subsequent step S1009, whether or not the player's face height position, player face orientation and pupil 300a position specified in step S1002 correspond to the nail installation range RA1 set in the design stage. Determine whether. The height position of the player's face corresponding to the nail installation range RA1, the orientation of the player's face, and the position of the pupil 300a are set at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10.

  If the determination in step S1009 is affirmative, “1” is added to the value of the nail continuous counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1010. The nail continuous counter is a counter for allowing the sound light side MPU 93 to grasp that the player is continuously watching a large number of nails 59 provided on the game board 51. In step S1011, it is determined whether or not the addition condition of the nail counter provided in the sound side RAM 95 is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the nail continuous counter exceeds “50”. If the determination in step S1011 is affirmative, the value of the nail continuous counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S1012. By providing the processing, it is possible to add the value of the nail counter at a constant interval. In subsequent step S1013, the value of the nail counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is incremented by “1”. That is, when the nail 59 is continuously viewed, the value of the nail counter is incremented by “1” every 0.5 sec. If a negative determination is made in step S1009, the value of the nail continuous counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S1014.

  Returning to the description of the pre-seating determination process (FIG. 34), if a negative determination is made in step S902, it is determined in step S904 whether or not the player is seated. Specifically, first, the visible image data for one frame is grasped based on the visible image data stored in the visible image storage area 95a of the sound side RAM 95, and the human face portion is included in the grasped visible image data. And whether the visible image data equivalent to the chair arrange | positioned in front of the pachinko machine 10 exists is specified. When specifying the person's face, a range corresponding to the contour portion of the face corresponding to an elliptical shape or a circular shape is extracted, and there is a range corresponding to the eyes, nose, mouth or ear in the extracted range. If it is, the extracted range is recognized as a face. Then, by grasping the distance data stored in the distance data storage area 95b of the sound light side RAM 95, the distance from the imaging device 73 to the player's face data is specified, and the distance data is the design of the pachinko machine 10. It is determined whether or not the value is smaller than the value set in the stage.

  In addition, when a range corresponding to the backrest of a chair corresponding to a square shape or a circular shape cannot be extracted from one frame of visible image data, there is no visible image data corresponding to the chair. In step S904, the distance data of the player's face is smaller than the value set in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and corresponds to a chair placed in front of the pachinko machine 10 in one frame of visible image data. A positive determination is made when no visible image data exists.

  If the determination in step S904 is affirmative, it is determined in step S905 whether or not the value of the pre-seating counter provided in the sound side RAM 95 is greater than or equal to the value set in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter before sitting is “2000” or more. More specifically, step S905 is affirmed when 20 seconds or more have elapsed since the start of the process of adding to the counter before sitting, and step S905 is negative when it is less than 20 seconds.

  If a negative determination is made in step S905, it is determined in step S906 whether a value is set in the pre-seating counter. The pre-seat counter is used to count the time until the player appears in front of the pachinko machine 10 and sits in a chair installed in front of the pachinko machine 10 as described above. In addition, the value of the counter before sitting is cleared to “0” when the attention type before sitting is set in the pre-sitting type setting process described later. The pre-sitting type setting process is a process for setting the attention type before sitting. That is, the state in which the value is set in the pre-sitting counter is a period for setting the attention type before sitting. Here, if the process of step S906 is not provided, the before-sitting type setting process described later is executed in a state where the attention type before sitting is set. Therefore, by providing the processing, it is possible to prevent the attention type before sitting from being set again in the situation where the attention type before sitting is set.

  If the determination in step S906 is affirmative, the type setting process before seating is executed in step S907. The pre-sitting type setting process refers to a process of setting the attention type before sitting with reference to the value of the nail counter and the value of the game history display counter. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the pre-seating type setting process executed by the sound light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the value of the game history display counter and the value of the nail counter are equal to or less than the set values set in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. The set value is set to “6” for both the game history display counter and the nail counter. If the determination in step S1101 is affirmative, “1” is set to the pre-sitting throwing flag provided in the sound side RAM 95 in step S1102. In other words, the game history display unit 200 and the nails 59 provided in the pachinko machine 10 are continuously connected during the time from when the value is set in the pre-seat counter until the player sits on the chair placed in front of the pachinko machine 10. Then, when both of these times are 3 sec or less, “1” is set in the pre-sitting throwing flag. The pre-sitting throwing flag is a flag for causing the sound-side MPU 93 to specify that the attention type before sitting is the throwing type.

  If the determination in step S1101 is negative, it is determined in step S1103 whether or not the value of the nail counter is equal to or less than the set value set in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. The set value of the nail counter is set to “12”. If the determination in step S1103 is affirmative, “1” is set to the pre-seating amateur flag provided in the sound side RAM 95 in step S1104. That is, in the time from when the value is set in the pre-seat counter until the player sits on the chair placed in front of the pachinko machine 10, either the game history display unit 200 or the nail 59 provided in the pachinko machine 10 When the time for continuously viewing these is longer than 3 seconds and the time for continuously viewing the nails 59 provided in the pachinko machine 10 is 6 seconds or less, “1” is set in the pre-seating amateur flag. The pre-sitting amateur flag is a flag for causing the sound light side MPU 93 to specify that the attention type before sitting is an amateur type.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1103, “1” is set to the pre-seating pro flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1105. That is, in the time from when the value is set in the pre-seat counter until the player is seated in the chair placed in front of the pachinko machine 10, the time when the nails 59 provided in the pachinko machine 10 are continuously viewed is If it is longer than 6 sec, “1” is set in the pre-sitting pro flag. The pre-sitting pro flag is a flag for causing the sound light side MPU 93 to specify that the attention type before sitting is a pro type.

  Returning to the description of the pre-seating determination process (FIG. 34), if an affirmative determination is made in step S905, “1” is set to the pre-seating suspicion flag provided in the sound side RAM 95 in step S908. That is, when the time from when a value is set in the pre-seat counter until the player is seated in the chair placed in front of the pachinko machine 10 is 20 seconds or more (the pre-seat counter value is “2000” or more). , “1” is set in the pre-sitting suspicion flag. The pre-sitting suspicion flag is a flag for causing the sound side MPU 93 to specify that the attention type before sitting is the suspicion type.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S904, when the process of step S907 is executed, or when the process of step S908 is executed, the values of various counters are cleared to “0” in the subsequent step S909.

<Judgment processing after sitting>
Next, the post-seating determination process executed in step S509 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the sound light side MPU 93 will be described with reference to FIG. The post-seating determination process uses the imaging result of the imaging unit 70 to identify an event that is being watched by a player seated on a chair placed in front of the pachinko machine 10, and an attention type corresponding to the identification result It is a process performed in order to set the execution mode of the production according to. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a post-seating determination process executed by the sound light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the operation handle 37b of the firing operation device 37 is operated. Specifically, as described above, the power / fire control device 108 receives a signal indicating that the operation handle 37b is touched by the player from the touch sensor 37c, and the fire stop operation is not performed. On the condition that a signal indicating this is received from the stop switch 37e, a HI level signal condition establishment signal is continuously transmitted to the main MPU 83. When reception of the HI level condition satisfaction signal is started, the main side MPU 83 transmits a launch operation start command to the sound light side MPU 93. When reception of the HI level condition satisfaction signal is ended, the sound side MPU 93 Send a firing operation end command to. In step S1201, it is determined that the launch operation is being performed in a situation where the launch operation start command has been received and the launch operation end command has not been received.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1201, the visible image data for one frame stored in the visible image storage area 95a provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1202 and the distance data stored in the distance data storage area 95b. It is determined whether or not it is time to use in the determination process after sitting. This timing is after 10 msec from the previous processing timing. Here, as described above, the imaging cycle of the imaging device 73 is 4 msec. That is, the cycle in which the visible image data for one frame stored in the visible image storage area 95a and the distance data stored in the distance data storage area 95b are used in the post-seating determination process is greater than the imaging cycle of the imaging device 73. Therefore, the same visible image as the previously referenced visible image and the same distance data as the previously referred distance data are not referred to.

  If the determination in step S1202 is affirmative, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not “1” is set in any of the before-seating type flags. The pre-seat type flag refers to a pre-seat throwing flag, a pre-seat pro flag, a pre-seat amateur flag, and a pre-seat suspicion flag. As described above, the pre-sitting type flag is a flag for causing the sound light side MPU 93 to specify the type of the attention type before sitting. “1” is set when the attention type before sitting is set, and “0” is cleared when the attention type before and after sitting is set. Here, if the process of step S1203 is not provided, the after-seating type setting process described later is executed in a state where the attention type before and after sitting is set. The post-seating type setting process is a process for setting an attention type after sitting. Therefore, by providing the processing, it is possible to prevent the attention type after sitting from being set again in the situation where the attention type before and after sitting is set. If the determination in step S1203 is affirmative, it is determined in step S1204 whether or not there is a player seated by referring to the visible image data for one frame. The specific processing content is the same as the processing in step S904 of the pre-seating determination processing (FIG. 34).

  If the determination in step S1204 is affirmative, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not “1” is set in a post-seating flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95. The post-seating flag refers to the visible image data for one frame stored in the visible image storage area 95a provided in the sound side RAM 95 and the distance data stored in the distance data storage area 95b. This flag is used to identify an event that is being watched by the player after sitting.

  If the determination in step S1205 is negative, it is determined in step S1206 whether or not visible image data is stored in the prior data storage area 95c provided in the sound light side RAM 95. The pre-data storage area 95c is an area provided in the sound light side RAM 95 for storing visible image data of the face of a player seated on a chair placed in front of the pachinko machine 10. Here, in this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the player who has left the chair placed in front of the pachinko machine 10 is the same as the player who has been seated in the chair placed in front of the pachinko machine 10 again. Depending on how, the subsequent processing mode is different. The face data of the player who has left the chair placed in front of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the pre-data storage area 95c. Further, the face data of the player who is seated in the chair placed in front of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in a collation data storage area 95d described later. That is, by referring to the face data stored in the pre-data storage area 95c and the face data stored in the verification data storage area 95d, it is determined whether or not the player is the same before and after leaving the seat. judge. Further, since the face data stored in the pre-data storage area 95c is erased when the power is cut off, it is necessary to store the player's face data in the pre-data storage area 95c again at power-on. In step S1206, a negative determination is made when a player appears in front of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of power-on, and a positive determination is made when the player's face data is stored in the pre-data storage area 95c.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1206, face storage processing is executed in step S1207. The face storage processing is performed when the player's face data is stored on the sound side when the player is seated in a chair arranged in front of the pachinko machine 10 in a situation where the face data is not stored in the pre-data storage area 95c. This process is performed to store the data in the pre-data storage area 95c provided in the RAM 95. The face storage process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing face storage processing executed by the sound light side MPU 93.

  First, face data extraction processing is executed in step S1301. Specifically, the visible image data for one frame is grasped based on the visible image data stored in the visible image storage area 95a of the sound side RAM 95, and the human face portion is included in the grasped visible image data. It is determined whether or not corresponding visible image data exists. At the time of the determination, when a range corresponding to the contour portion of the face corresponding to an elliptical shape or a circular shape is extracted, and the range corresponding to the eyes, nose, mouth or ear exists in the extracted range The extracted range is recognized as a face.

  In step S1302, it is determined whether face data extraction has been completed. If the determination in step S1302 is affirmative, face data storage processing is executed in step S1303. Specifically, the extracted face data is stored in a pre-data storage area 95 c provided in the sound side RAM 95.

  Returning to the post-seating determination process (FIG. 37), when the process of step S1207 is executed, it is determined in step S1208 whether the extraction of face data is completed. The face data is face data to be stored in the pre-data storage area 95c. By providing the processing in step S1208, it is possible to prevent “1” from being set in the after-sitting flag described above in a situation where the player's face data is not stored in the pre-data storage area 95c.

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S1206, face authentication processing is executed in step S1209. The face authentication process is a process performed to identify whether or not the players before and after leaving the seat are the same person. In the face authentication process, the player's face data is extracted based on the visible image data stored in the visible image storage area 95 a provided in the sound light side RAM 95, and is stored in the verification data storage provided in the sound light side RAM 95. Store in area 95d. Then, it is determined whether or not the player's face data stored in the previous data storage area 95c matches the player's face data stored in the verification data storage area 95d. In this pachinko machine 10, the processing mode differs depending on whether the player's face data matches or does not match. Specifically, when the player's face data matches before and after leaving the seat, the attention type set before leaving the seat is taken over as it is. If the player's face data does not match before and after leaving the seat, the attention type set before leaving the seat is deleted, and the attention type is set again. The specific contents of the face authentication process will be described in detail later.

  In a succeeding step S1210, it is determined whether or not the face data extraction is completed. The face data is face data to be stored in the collation data storage area 95d. If the processing of step S1210 is not provided, it is determined whether or not the player's face data matches in a state where the face data is not stored in the verification data storage area 95d.

  If the determination in step S1210 is affirmative, it is determined in step S1211 whether or not the player's face data matches. Specifically, as described above, the player's face data stored in the pre-data storage area 95c matches the player's face data stored in the collation data storage area 95d. It is determined whether or not.

  If the determination in step S1211 is negative, or if the determination in step S1208 is affirmative, “1” is set in a post-seating flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1212.

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S1205, a post-seating type determination process is executed in step S1213. The post-seating type determination process will be described with reference to FIG. The post-seating type determination process is performed to set an attention type according to the direction of the player's line of sight after sitting. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a post-seating type determination process executed by the sound light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S1401, “1” is added to the value of the after-sitting counter provided in the sound side RAM 95. The post-seating counter is used to count the time until the player sits on a chair installed in front of the pachinko machine 10 and starts the game. The value after the seating is incremented by “1” every predetermined time (10 msec).

  In step S1402, the height position, the face direction, and the position of the pupil 300a captured this time are grasped. The specific processing content is the same as that in step S1002. In subsequent step S1403, whether or not the height position of the player's face specified in step S1402, the orientation of the player's face, and the position of the pupil 300a correspond to the booklet confirmation range RA3 set in the design stage. Determine whether. The height position of the player's face, the orientation of the player's face, and the position of the pupil 300a corresponding to the booklet confirmation range RA3 are set at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, in this process, the visible image data for one frame is grasped based on the visible image data stored in the visible image storage area 95a of the sound side RAM 95, and a booklet such as a rectangle is included in the grasped visible image data. It is determined whether or not the corresponding visible image data exists.

  In step S1403, the height position of the player's face specified in step S1402, the orientation of the player's face, and the position of the pupil 300a correspond to the booklet confirmation range RA3 set in the design stage, and one frame Affirmative determination is made when a range corresponding to a booklet is extracted from the visible image data of minutes. The reason why the range corresponding to the booklet is also extracted is that the height position of the identified player's face, the orientation of the player's face, and the position of the pupil 300a correspond to the booklet confirmation range RA3 set at the design stage. This is because the player does not always look at the booklet.

  If the determination in step S1403 is affirmative, “1” is added to the value of the booklet continuous counter provided in the sound side RAM 95 in step S1404. The booklet continuous counter is a counter for causing the sound light side MPU 93 to grasp that the player is continuously watching the booklet. In step S1405, it is determined whether or not a booklet counter addition condition provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the booklet continuous counter exceeds “50”. If the determination in step S1405 is affirmative, the value of the booklet continuous counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S1406. By providing this processing, the value of the booklet counter can be added at a constant interval. In subsequent step S1407, the value of the booklet counter provided in the sound side RAM 95 is incremented by “1”. That is, when the booklet is viewed continuously, the value of the booklet counter is incremented by “1” every 0.5 sec.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1403, the value of the booklet continuous counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S1408. In subsequent step S1409, whether or not the height position of the player's face specified in step S1402, the orientation of the player's face, and the position of the pupil 300a correspond to the nail installation range RA1 set in the design stage. Determine whether. The height position of the player's face corresponding to the nail installation range RA1, the orientation of the player's face, and the position of the pupil 300a are set at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10.

  If the determination in step S1409 is affirmative, “1” is added to the value of the nail continuous counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1410. The nail continuous counter is a counter for allowing the sound light side MPU 93 to grasp that the player is continuously watching a large number of nails 59 provided on the game board 51. In step S1411, it is determined whether a condition for adding a nail counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the nail continuous counter exceeds “50”. If the determination in step S1411 is affirmative, the value of the nail continuous counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S1412. By providing the processing, it is possible to add the value of the nail counter at a constant interval. In subsequent step S1413, the value of the nail counter provided in the sound side RAM 95 is incremented by “1”. That is, when the nail 59 is continuously viewed, the value of the nail counter is incremented by “1” every 0.5 sec. If a negative determination is made in step S1409, the value of the nail continuous counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S1414.

  Returning to the description of the post-seating determination process (FIG. 37), if the determination in step S1201 is affirmative, whether or not “1” is set in any of the target point type flags provided in the sound side RAM 95 in step S1214. Determine whether. The attention point type flag refers to a liquid crystal concentration type flag, a nail concentration type flag, and a movable accessory concentration flag, which will be described later, and indicates the attention type of the player during the game. The target point type flag is set in a target point type setting process (FIG. 49) described later. The point-of-interest type setting process is a process for setting an attention type corresponding to an event that the player is paying attention to during the game. The attention point type flag is set to “1” when the attention type corresponding to the event that the player is paying attention to during the game is set. Thereafter, until the player is changed, the state in which the attention type corresponding to the event that the player is paying attention to during the game is set is maintained. Here, if the process of step S1214 is not provided, the after-seating type setting process is executed in a state where the attention type corresponding to the event that the player is paying attention to during the game is set. Therefore, by providing this processing, it is possible to prevent the attention type after sitting from being set again after the attention type corresponding to the event that the player is paying attention to during the game is set. It becomes.

  If the determination in step S1214 is negative, it is determined in step S1215 whether or not “1” is set in the individual rotation speed flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95. The individual rotational speed flag is a flag for causing the sound light side MPU 93 to specify that the player's attention type is set during the game. The individual rotation number flag is set in a start type setting process (FIG. 41) described later. The start type setting process is a process that is performed to set the attention type corresponding to the attention type before and after sitting when the attention type before and after sitting is set. The individual rotation number flag is set to “1” when the attention type corresponding to the attention type before and after sitting is set. Until the attention type corresponding to the event that the player is paying attention to during the game is set, “1” is set in the individual rotation number flag, and the attention type corresponding to the attention type before and after sitting is set. Is maintained. Here, if the process of step S1215 is not provided, the post-seating type setting process is executed in a state where the attention type corresponding to the attention type before and after the seating is set. Therefore, by providing the processing, it is possible to prevent the attention type after sitting from being set again after the attention type corresponding to the attention type before and after sitting is set.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1215, it is determined in step S1216 whether or not the value of the after-sitting counter provided in the sound side RAM 95 is equal to or greater than the set value set in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter after sitting is “2000” or more. Since the value of the counter after sitting is incremented by “1” every predetermined time (10 msec), it becomes “2000” in 20 sec (10 msec × 2000).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1216, a post-seating type setting process is executed in step S1217. The post-seating type setting process will be described with reference to FIG. The post-seating type setting process is a process performed to set the attention type of the player after sitting with reference to the value of the booklet counter and the value of the nail counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the post-seating type setting process executed by the sound light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S1501, it is determined whether the value of the booklet counter and the value of the nail counter are equal to or less than the set values set in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the values of the booklet counter and the nail counter are both “6” or less. If the determination in step S1501 is affirmative, “1” is set in the post-seating throwing flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1502. That is, the time when the booklet and the nail 59 provided in the pachinko machine 10 are continuously viewed in the time from when the counter is set to the counter until the operation handle 37b of the firing operation device 37 is operated in less than 20 seconds. When both are 3 sec or less, “1” is set to the throwing flag after sitting. The post-sitting throwing flag is a flag for causing the sound light side MPU 93 to specify that the attention type after sitting is the throwing type.

  If the determination in step S1501 is negative, it is determined in step S1503 whether the value of the booklet counter is equal to or greater than the value of the nail counter. If a negative determination is made in step S1503, “1” is set to the post-seating pro flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1504. That is, either the booklet or the nail 59 provided in the pachinko machine 10 is continuously used in the time from when the value is set in the counter after sitting until the operation handle 37b of the firing operation device 37 is operated in less than 20 seconds. When the watched time is longer than 3 seconds and the value of the nail counter is larger than the value of the booklet counter, “1” is set in the pro flag after sitting. The post-seating pro flag is a flag for causing the sound light side MPU 93 to specify that the attention type after sitting is a pro type.

  If the determination in step S1503 is affirmative, “1” is set in the post-seating amateur flag provided in the sound-light side RAM 95 in step S1505. That is, either the booklet or the nail 59 provided in the pachinko machine 10 is continuously used in the time from when the value is set in the counter after sitting until the operation handle 37b of the firing operation device 37 is operated in less than 20 seconds. When the viewed time is longer than 3 sec and the value of the booklet counter is equal to or greater than the value of the nail counter, “1” is set in the amateur flag after sitting. The post-seating amateur flag is a flag for causing the sound light side MPU 93 to specify that the attention type after sitting is an amateur type.

  When any of the processing of step S1502, step S1504, and step S1505 is executed, the post-seating flag and various counter values are cleared to “0” in step S1506.

  Returning to the description of the post-seating determination process (FIG. 37), if an affirmative determination is made in step S1216, “1” is set to the post-seating suspicion flag provided in the sound side RAM 95 in step S1218, and the post-sitting flag And the values of various counters are cleared to “0”. That is, “1” is set to the post-sitting suspicion flag when the time from when the value is set in the after-sitting counter until the operation handle 37b of the firing operation device 37 is operated has exceeded 20 seconds. . The post-seating suspicion / devil flag is a flag for causing the sound side MPU 93 to specify that the attention type after being seated is the suspicion / devil type.

<Start type setting process>
Next, the start type setting process executed in step S510 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the sound light side MPU 93 will be described with reference to FIG. In the start type setting process, it is determined whether or not the attention types set in the pre-seating determination process and the post-sitting determination process are the same, and the attention types set before and after the seating are the same The same attention type as that set before and after sitting is set. In addition, when the attention types set before and after sitting are different attention types, a normal type described later is set. That is, by performing the start time type setting process, it is possible to strictly set the player's attention type before the game. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing start type setting processing executed by the sound light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the before-seating type flag and the after-seating type flag provided in the sound side RAM 95. By providing the processing, it is possible to make the sound light side MPU 93 grasp the timing for setting the attention type at the start of the game. If the determination in step S1601 is affirmative, it is determined in step S1602 whether both the before-sitting type flag and the after-sitting type flag are throwing type flags. Specifically, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the pre-sitting throwing flag and the post-sitting throwing flag provided in the sound side RAM 95. If the determination in step S1602 is affirmative, the throwing type table is read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1603. In the throwing type table, command types and lottery tables are set in a one-to-one correspondence. That is, the lottery table corresponding to the throwing type table can be read by reading the throwing type table from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95. Thereby, the execution mode of the production according to the throwing type is set.

  When negative determination is made in step S1602, it is determined in step S1604 whether both the before-sitting type flag and the after-sitting type flag are amateur type flags. Specifically, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the pre-seating amateur flag and the post-seating amateur flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1604, the amateur type table is read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1605. In the amateur type table, command types and lottery tables are set in a one-to-one correspondence. That is, by reading the amateur type table from the sound side ROM 94 to the sound side RAM 95, it is possible to read the lottery table corresponding to the amateur type table. Thereby, the execution mode of the production according to the amateur type is set.

  If negative determination is made in step S1604, it is determined in step S1606 whether or not both the pre-seating type flag and the post-seating type flag are pro-type flags. Specifically, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the pre-seating pro flag and the post-sitting pro flag provided in the sound side RAM 95. If the determination in step S1606 is affirmative, the protype table is read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1607. In the protype table, command types and lottery tables are set in a one-to-one correspondence. That is, the lottery table corresponding to the protype table can be read by reading the protype table from the sound side ROM 94 to the sound side RAM 95. Thereby, the execution mode of the production according to the professional type is set.

  If negative determination is made in step S1606, it is determined in step S1608 whether both the pre-seating type flag and the post-seating type flag are suspicious type flags. Specifically, it is determined whether “1” is set in the pre-sitting suspicion flag and the post-sitting suspicion flag provided in the sound side RAM 95. If the determination in step S1608 is affirmative, the suspicion type table is read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1609. In the suspicion type table, command types and lottery tables are set in a one-to-one correspondence. That is, the lottery table corresponding to the suspicious darkness type table can be read by reading the suspicious darkness type table from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95. Thereby, the execution mode of the production according to the suspicion type is set.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1608, the normal type table is read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1610. In the normal type table, command types and lottery tables are set in a one-to-one correspondence. That is, the normal type table is read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95, so that the lottery table corresponding to the normal type table can be read. Thereby, the execution mode of the production according to the normal type is set.

  If any type table is read, “1” is set to the individual rotation number flag provided in the sound-light side RAM 95 in step S1611. When “1” is set in the individual rotation number flag, the individual rotation number provided in the sound side RAM 95 in the game number update process executed in step S609 of the main-side command handling process (FIG. 15). The counter is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the number of digestion games measured in the individual rotation number counter. The individual rotation speed counter is used to count the specified rotation speed (30 rotations). By using the imaging result on the imaging board 71 up to the specified number of rotations, an event that the player is paying attention to is specified, and an effect execution mode corresponding to the attention type corresponding to the identification result is set. In other words, the timing for changing the attention type from the attention type set before the start of the game to the attention type set during the game is determined by providing the individual rotation number counter and specifying that the specified rotation speed has been digested. It becomes possible. In addition, when the prescribed number of revolutions is digested, or when the player leaves the seat before digesting the prescribed number of revolutions, and the player who is seated again is not the same person as before leaving, the data is read to the sound side RAM 95. Type table is deleted. In subsequent step S1612, the pre-seat type flag and the post-seat type flag provided on the sound light side RA95 are cleared to “0”.

<Attention type in game with this pachinko machine 10>
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, an event that is noticed by the player during the game is specified using the imaging result on the imaging board 71, and the execution mode of the effect is set to a mode corresponding to the specified result. The Specifically, as events that the player pays attention during the game, there are a symbol display device 61, a nail 59 provided on the game board 51, a movable object unit 38, and movable accessories 39a, 39b, and 39c. . And after the start of the game in the pachinko machine 10, the event that the player is paying attention to among the above events is identified using the imaging result on the imaging substrate 71, and the attention type corresponding to the identification result is determined. An effect execution mode is set. Here, prior to the identification of the attention type and the description of the execution mode of the production corresponding to each attention type, the movable object unit 38 and the movable accessories 39a, 39b, and 39c provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described first.

<Moving object unit 38 and moving objects 39a, 39b, 39c>
The movable object unit 38 and the movable accessories 39a, 39b, and 39c will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b) are explanatory views for explaining the operation of the movable object unit 38, and FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (c) illustrate the operation of the movable accessories 39a, 39b and 39c. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating.

  The movable object unit 38 is provided on the upper part of the center frame 65 installed in the game area PA (see FIG. 4). As shown in FIG. 42 (a), a pair of upper and lower effect movable objects 38a and 38b and a movable object unit drive unit 38c such as a rotary motor for operating these effect movable objects 38a and 38b are provided.

  In a situation where the movable object unit drive section 38c is not in a driving state, both effect movable objects 38a and 38b are arranged in the vertical direction by an urging force of an urging means (not shown) such as a spring, and these effect movable objects 38a and 38b. Each of the effect movable objects 38a and 38b is arranged at an initial position where the space surrounded by is invisible or difficult to view from the front of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), when the movable object unit drive unit 38c is in the driving state, one of the movable objects 38a and 38b for both productions moves upward and downward against the urging force of the urging means. The other movable elements 38a, 38b move to an open position where the other is displaced downward and the enclosed space is opened forward.

  A decorative member 38d is arranged in a space surrounded by these effect movable objects 38a and 38b. When each production movable object 38a, 38b is arranged at the initial position, the decorative member 38d is not visible or difficult to see from the front of the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, when each of the production movable objects 38a and 38b moves toward the open position, the decoration member 38d can be easily visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 as shown in FIG. .

  The movable combination items 39a, 39b, and 39c are provided on the upper portion of the center frame 65 installed in the game area PA as described above (see FIG. 4). As shown in FIG. 43, the sizes of the movable combinations 39a, 39b, and 39c are different from each other. The small movable combination 39a, the middle movable combination 39b, and the large movable combination are sequentially viewed from the right when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. An accessory 39c is provided. Further, movable accessory driving portions 39d, 39e, 39f such as a rotary motor for operating these movable accessories 39a, 39b, 39c are provided in correspondence with the respective movable actors 39a, 39b, 39c. Specifically, the drive unit that operates the small movable combination 39a is the small movable combination drive unit 39d, and the drive unit that operates the medium movable combination 39b is the medium movable combination drive unit 39e. The driving unit that operates the object 39c is a large movable accessory driving unit 39f.

  Next, the operation of the movable accessory 39a, 39b, 39c will be described. There are three operation patterns of the movable accessories 39a, 39b, and 39c. As shown in FIG. 43 (a), only the small movable accessory 39a moves up and down at the stage of STEP1, and as shown in FIG. 43 (b), the small movable accessory 39a and the middle movable accessory at the stage of STEP2. 39b operates up and down. Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (c), the small movable combination 39a, the middle movable combination 39b, and the large movable combination 39c move up and down at STEP3.

<Advance notice and reach production with a big difference in jackpot expectation>
Next, prior to specifying the attention type and describing the execution mode of the effects corresponding to each attention type, an example of effects generated after the specified number of rotations will be described. With reference to FIG. 44, a description will be given of a notice with a low jackpot expectation and a notice with a high expectation. 44 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first character notice, FIG. 44 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the third character notice, and FIG. 44 (c) is a button notice. It is explanatory drawing for doing. FIG. 44 (a) shows a notice with a low jackpot expectation, and FIGS. 44 (b) and 44 (c) show a notice with a high jackpot expectation.

  First, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), in the advance notice with a low jackpot expectation, one character is displayed at the lower left end of the symbol display device 61 in the first character notice. Although not shown, there is also a second character notice in which a plurality of characters are displayed at the lower left and right ends of the symbol display device 61. Also, the tutorial-type message notice shown in FIG.

  Next, in the notice with a high jackpot expectation, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), in the third character notice, a plurality of characters are displayed at the lower left and right ends of the symbol display device 61, and the symbol display device 61 is further displayed. A character having a size larger than that of the character is displayed in the center below. Also, as shown in FIG. 44 (c), in the button notice, a screen for allowing the player to press the effect button 40 is displayed near the center of the symbol display device 61.

  Further, the reach production with a low jackpot expectation is a normal production and an apology production shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, and the reach production with a high jackpot expectation is a beat and intense heat production shown in FIG. 23 and FIG. 24. This is the production.

<Characteristics for each type of attention set after the specified speed>
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the specified number of rotations (30 rotations) has elapsed since the game was started, the attention type corresponding to the event that the player has noticed up to the specified number of rotations is set at the start of the game. It is set instead of the attention type. Moreover, the frequency of occurrence of various effects differs for each attention type. However, even if the frequency of occurrence of various effects differs for each type of attention, there is no difference in the degree of jackpot expectation. In other words, the jackpot expectation is the same regardless of which attention type is set. The features for each type of attention set after the specified rotational speed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45A is an explanatory diagram for explaining that the occurrence frequency of the liquid crystal effect is different for each type of attention set after the specified rotational speed, and FIG. 45B is set after the specified rotational speed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating that the generation frequency of the production | presentation using the movable object unit 38 and movable accessory 39a, 39b, 39c differs for every attention type.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (a), the player's attention type after the specified number of rotations is classified into three. Specifically, there are three types: a liquid crystal concentration type, a nail concentration type, and a movable accessory concentration type. Further, the execution mode of the effect varies depending on the type of attention type. Hereinafter, specific features of the attention type will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 45A, the liquid crystal concentration type is characterized in that the occurrence frequency of the notice effect and the reach effect is higher than that of the movable accessory concentration type. Since the liquid crystal concentration type player tends to stare at the symbol display device 61 during the game, by making the occurrence frequency of the notice effect and the reach effect higher than the movable agent concentration type, the symbol display device 61 It is possible to attract players. In addition, since the liquid crystal concentration type player is not particularly concerned about the contents of the notification of the gaming state and wants to watch the notification of each gaming state in a balanced manner, the occurrence frequency of the notification of each gaming state is the same. In addition, as shown in FIG. 45B, the liquid crystal concentration type has a lower frequency of production using the movable object unit 38 and the movable combinations 39a, 39b, and 39c than the movable combination center type. This is because, as described above, a liquid crystal concentration type player tends to stare at the symbol display device 61 during the game, and rarely sees an effect using the movable object unit 38 and the movable combination items 39a, 39b, and 39c. Because.

  In the case of the nail concentration type, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), the occurrence frequency of the notice effect and the reach effect with high expectation of jackpot is higher than that of the movable accessory concentration type. Further, the occurrence frequency of the notice effect with a low jackpot expectation level and the occurrence frequency of the reach effect with a low jackpot expectation level are lower than those of the liquid crystal concentration type. The nail-concentrated player tends to frequently check the nails 59 provided on the game board 51, and is not interested in the notice effect and the reach effect displayed on the symbol display device 61. Here, regarding the notice effect and reach effect with a low degree of jackpot expectation, since it is impossible to expect the jackpot, it is considered that there is little staring at the notice effect and reach effect. Further, regarding the notice effect and reach effect with a high degree of jackpot expectation, it can be expected that the jackpot is expected, so it is considered that the notice effect and reach effect are often stared. Therefore, the nail concentration type is set to have a lower occurrence frequency of the announcement effect and the reach effect with a lower jackpot expectation than the liquid crystal concentration type, and the occurrence frequency of the announcement effect and the reach effect with a higher expectation degree of the jackpot is concentrated in the movable accessory concentration. It is set to be higher than the type. In the notification of the gaming state, it is set so that the occurrence frequency of prior notification is increased. The reason will be described later.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), the nail concentration type has a lower frequency of production using the movable object unit 38 and the movable accessories 39a, 39b, 39c than the movable accessory concentration type. This is because the nail-concentrated player is less interested in events other than the nail 59 provided on the game board 51 (the symbol display device 61, the movable object unit 38, and the movable accessory 39a, 39b, 39c). .

  In the case of the movable accessory concentration type, as shown in FIG. 45A, the occurrence frequency of the notice effect and the reach effect is lower than the liquid crystal concentration type and the nail concentration type. The movable accessory concentration type player rarely stares at the nail 59 provided on the symbol display device 61 and the game board 51, and tends to stare at the movable object unit 38 and the movable accessory 39a, 39b, 39c. is there. Therefore, the occurrence frequency of the notice effect and the reach effect displayed on the symbol display device 61 is set lower than the liquid crystal concentration type and the nail concentration type. In the game state notification, the frequency of promotion is set to be high. The reason will be described later. In addition, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), the movable accessory concentration type has a higher frequency of production using the movable object unit 38 and the movable accessory 39a, 39b, 39c than the liquid crystal concentration type and the nail concentration type. This is because, as described above, the movable accessory concentration type player tends to stare at the movable object unit 38 and the movable accessory 39a, 39b, 39c during the game.

<Type table and data table set after specified speed>
Next, the lottery table read in step S603 of the main-side command handling process (FIG. 15) after the specified rotational speed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a type table in the liquid crystal concentration type.

  First, a type table in the liquid crystal concentration type will be described with reference to FIG. In the type table, command types and lottery tables are set in a one-to-one correspondence. Here, when the attention type of the player is specified, the type table corresponding to the attention type is read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95. In step S603 of the main-side command handling process (FIG. 15), the lottery table corresponding to the type of command transmitted from the main-side MPU 83 is referred to the sound-side RAM 95 with reference to the type table read to the sound-side RAM 95. read out. Also, in the case of the attention type other than the liquid crystal concentration type, the type of command and the lottery table are set in a one-to-one correspondence as in the liquid crystal concentration type. However, the contents of a notice lottery table, a reach production lottery table, and a game state notification lottery table, which will be described later, provided in the lottery table are different. Specifically, the numerical value ranges of the counters provided in the respective tables and the display contents are different for each attention type. That is, the numerical ranges of various counters are set according to the feature of the attention type shown in FIG.

  Next, the lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 (b) to 46 (c). Here, the liquid crystal concentration system first outreach lottery table will be described as an example. As shown in FIGS. 46B to 46C, the liquid crystal concentration system first outreach reach lottery table includes a notice lottery table and a reach effect lottery table. First, the notice lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the notice lottery table in the liquid crystal concentration system first outreach lottery table.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (b), in the notice lottery table, the numerical range of the notice counter RN and the notice contents are set in a one-to-one correspondence. Further, the distribution of the numerical range of the notice counter RN and the notice contents is different for each attention type. The content of the advance notice is determined by referring to the lottery table specified in step S603 of the main-side command handling process (FIG. 15) and referring to the value of the advance notice counter RN in the process of step S604.

  The value of the notice counter RN and the notice contents are associated with each other as shown in FIG. 44 (a) with the notice counter RN being “0-19” and no notice, and the notice counter RN being “20 to 49”. 1 character notice, the value of the notice counter RN is “50 to 69”, the second character notice, the value of the notice counter RN is “70 to 89”, and the tutorial type message notice and notice counter RN shown in FIG. When the value is “90 to 94”, the third character notice is shown in FIG. 44B, and when the notice counter RN is “95 to 99”, the button notice is shown in FIG. 44C. Here, the liquid crystal concentration type player is interested in the notice effect displayed on the symbol display device 61 irrespective of the jackpot expectation. Therefore, by increasing the occurrence frequency of the notice effect displayed on the symbol display device 61, it becomes possible to concentrate the liquid crystal concentration type player on the notice effect displayed on the symbol display device 61. . The notice counter RN is provided in the lottery counter area of the sound light side RAM 95. The notice counter RN is a loop counter that is updated at short time intervals, adds “1” to the previous value each time the update is performed, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value “99”.

  Here, although not shown, the association between the notice type counter RN of the attention type other than the liquid crystal concentration type and the notice contents will be described. First, in the case of the nail concentration type, the value of the notice counter RN is associated with the notice contents when the notice counter RN is “0 to 49”, no notice is given, and the notice counter RN is “50 to 59”. The first character notice and notice counter RN shown in 44 (a) has a value of "60 to 69", the second character notice and notice counter RN has a value of "70 to 79" and the tutorial type shown in FIG. The message notice, the value of the notice counter RN is “80 to 89”, the third character notice shown in FIG. 44B, and the value of the notice counter RN “90 to 99” is the button notice shown in FIG. 44C. . Here, the nail concentration type player is interested in the nail 59 provided on the game board 51. This is because a nail-concentrated player wants to know whether or not a game ball can easily enter the first operation port 54 by checking the nail 59 provided on the game board 51. In addition, regarding the notice effect that can be expected in the jackpot, since the expectation can be expected in the jackpot, there is a high possibility of staring at the notice effect that can be expected in the jackpot. The notice effect that can be expected for the jackpot is a third character notice and a button notice. Although details will be described later, when the success / failure result is a jackpot result, the occurrence frequency of the third character notice and the button notice is set to be high regardless of the type of attention type. By increasing the occurrence frequency of the third character notice and the button notice that can be expected for the jackpot, it becomes possible to make the player's consciousness of the nail concentration type player aim at the notice effect. Thereby, it becomes possible to reduce the consciousness that the game ball is difficult to enter the first operation port 54, and it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped immediately.

  Next, in the case of the movable accessory concentration type, the value of the notice counter RN and the notice contents are associated with each other with the notice counter RN value “0-69”, no notice, and the notice counter RN value “70-74”. 44 (a), the value of the first character notice / notice counter RN is “75 to 79”, the value of the second character notice / notice counter RN is “80 to 89”, and is shown in FIG. 20 (d). Buttons for the tutorial-type message notice and the notice counter RN of “90 to 94” shown in FIG. 44B and the third character notice and notice counter RN of “95 to 99” shown in FIG. It becomes a notice. Here, the movable accessory concentration type player is less interested in the notice effect displayed on the symbol display device 61. Therefore, by reducing the frequency of occurrence of the notice effect displayed on the symbol display device 61, it is possible to concentrate the consciousness on staring at the movable object unit 38 and the movable accessories 39a, 39b, 39c.

  When compared for each type of attention, the liquid crystal concentration type is more frequently noticed than the nail concentration type and the movable agent concentration type, and the movable agent concentration type is an advance notice than the liquid crystal concentration type and the nail concentration type. The frequency of production is low. In addition, in the case of the nail concentration type, the occurrence of the notice effect with a lower jackpot expectation is lower than the liquid crystal concentration type, but the notice effect with a higher jackpot expectation is higher than the liquid crystal concentration type and movable accessory concentration type. The occurrence frequency is set high. Further, as described above, even if the occurrence frequency of the notice effect differs for each type of attention, there is no difference in the degree of jackpot expectation. In other words, the jackpot expectation is the same regardless of which attention type is set.

  Next, the reach effect lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the reach production lottery table in the liquid crystal concentration system first outreach lottery table.

  As shown in FIG. 46C, in the reach effect lottery table, the numerical range of the reach effect counter RD and the content of the reach effect are set in a one-to-one correspondence. In addition, the distribution of the numerical range of the reach effect counter RD and the content of the reach effect is different for each attention type. The contents of the reach effect are determined by referring to the lottery table specified in step S603 of the main command corresponding process (FIG. 15) and referring to the value of the reach effect counter RD in the process of step S606.

  The value of the reach effect counter RD is associated with the content of the reach effect. The reach effect counter RD is “0 to 27” and the normal effect and reach effect counter RD shown in FIG. 56 ”is the apology-based production and reach production counter RD value“ 57 to 85 ”and FIG. 23 is the roaring production and reach production counter RD is“ 86 to 90 ”and FIG. Intense heat effect, reach effect counter RD is “91-94” and only small movable accessory 39a shown in FIG. 43 (a) is operated, reach effect counter RD is “95-97” 43 (b), the small movable combination 39a and the medium movable combination 39b shown in FIG. 43 (c) with the value of the production / reach production counter RD “98”. An accessory 39b and a large movable accessory 39c Effect to work, the value of the reach demonstration counter RD movable object unit 38 shown in FIG. 42 (b) by "99" has become a demonstration to operate. Here, the liquid crystal concentration type player is interested in the reach effect displayed on the symbol display device 61, and is not interested in the reach effect using the movable object unit 38 and the movable accessory 39a, 39b, 39c. Accordingly, by increasing the frequency of occurrence of reach effects displayed on the symbol display device 61 and decreasing the frequency of occurrence of reach effects using the movable object unit 38 and the movable accessories 39a, 39b, 39c, liquid crystal concentration is achieved. It is possible to concentrate the type of player on the reach effect displayed on the symbol display device 61. The reach effect counter RD is provided in the lottery counter area of the sound light side RAM 95. In addition, the reach effect counter RD is a loop counter that is updated at short time intervals, adds “1” to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value “99”.

  Here, although not shown, the correspondence between the reach effect counter RD and the notice content in the attention type other than the liquid crystal concentration type will be described. First, in the case of the nail concentration type, the value of the reach effect counter RD is associated with the reach effect of the reach effect counter RD of the normal effect and reach effect counter RD shown in FIG. When the value is “20 to 39”, the apology-type effect shown in FIG. 22 and the reach effect counter RD is “40 to 59”, and when the value is “40-59”, the beat effect and reach reach counter RD is “60-79”. 24, the value of the reach effect counter RD shown in FIG. 24 is “80 to 94”, the effect that the small movable accessory 39a shown in FIG. The small movable combination shown in FIG. 43 (c) when the small movable combination 39a and the medium movable combination 39b shown in FIG. 43 (b) operate and the value of the reach production counter RD is “98”. 39a, medium movable accessory 39b and large movable Production which object 39c is operated, the value of the reach demonstration counter RD movable object unit 38 shown in FIG. 42 (b) by "99" has become a demonstration to operate. Here, the nail concentration type player is interested in the nail 59 provided on the game board 51. This is because a nail-concentrated player wants to know whether or not a game ball can easily enter the first operation port 54 by checking the nail 59 provided on the game board 51. In addition, regarding the reach production that can be expected for the jackpot, since the expectation can be expected for the jackpot, there is a high possibility of staring at the reach production that can be expected for the jackpot. The reach effect that can be expected for the jackpot is the intense heat reach effect shown in FIG. 24, the effect in which the movable accessories 39a, 39b, and 39c operate as shown in FIG. 43 (c), and the movable object shown in FIG. 42 (b). It is an effect in which the unit 38 operates. Although details will be described later, when the success / failure result is a jackpot result, the occurrence frequency of the intense heat reach effect, the effect in which the movable accessory 39a, 39b, 39c operates and the effect in which the movable object unit 38 operates increases. It is set as follows. Here, the symbol display device 61 is larger than the movable accessory 39 a, 39 b, 39 c and the movable object unit 38. That is, the symbol display device 61 is easier to direct the player's consciousness than the movable combination items 39a, 39b, 39c and the movable item unit 38. Therefore, among the reach effects that can be expected to win, the game ball is less likely to enter the first operation port 54 by increasing the frequency of occurrence of the intense heat reach effect displayed on the symbol display device 61. It becomes possible to reduce the consciousness to this thing reliably.

  Next, in the case of the movable agent concentration type, the reach effect counter RD and the reach effect are associated with each other in the normal effect and reach effect shown in FIG. 21 when the reach effect counter RD is “0 to 9”. When the value of the counter RD is “10 to 19”, the apology effect shown in FIG. 22 and the value of the reach effect counter RD is “20 to 29”, and when the value of the reach effect counter RD shown in FIG. 30 to 34 ", the effect of the intense heat system shown in FIG. 24, the reach effect counter RD is" 35 to 69 ", the effect that the small movable accessory 39a shown in FIG. Production with the value “70 to 89” shown in FIG. 43 (b) and the effect of reaching the middle movable accessory 39b and the value of the reach production counter RD are “90 to 96” and FIG. 43 (c). Small movable combination 39a, medium movable combination 39b shown Beauty effect a large movable won game 39c is operated, the value of the reach demonstration counter RD movable object unit 38 shown in FIG. 42 (b) in the "97-99" is a demonstration that works. Here, the movable-object-concentrated player is less interested in the reach effect displayed on the symbol display device 61. Accordingly, by reducing the frequency of the reach effect displayed on the symbol display device 61, it becomes possible to concentrate the consciousness on staring at the movable object unit 38 and the movable accessory 39a, 39b, 39c. .

  When compared for each attention type, the liquid crystal concentration type has a higher frequency of reach effects displayed on the liquid crystal than the nail concentration type and the movable accessory concentration type. In the case of the nail concentration type, the occurrence frequency of the intense heat reach effect displayed on the symbol display device 61 is higher than that of the liquid crystal concentration type and the movable accessory concentration type. In the case of the movable accessory concentration type, the frequency of the reach effect using the movable object unit 38 and the movable accessory 39a, 39b, 39c is higher than that of the liquid crystal concentration type and the nail concentration type. In addition, as described above, even if the occurrence frequency of reach production differs for each type of attention, there is no difference in the degree of jackpot expectation. In other words, the jackpot expectation is the same regardless of which attention type is set.

  Next, the lottery table in the case where the success / failure result is a jackpot result will be described using the liquid crystal concentration system first jackpot reach lottery table as an example. However, the frequency of occurrence of each notice effect and each reach effect when the success / failure result is a jackpot result is the same for all attention types.

  First, associating the value of the notice counter RN with the notice contents is shown in FIG. 44A with the notice counter RN value “0-4”, no notice, and the notice counter RN value “5-9”. The first character notice, the notice counter RN is “10-14”, the second character notice, the notice counter RN is “15-19”, and the tutorial message notice, notice counter RN shown in FIG. The value of “20 to 59” is the third character notice shown in FIG. 44B, and the value of the notice counter RN is “60 to 99” and the button notice is shown in FIG. 44C. Here, when the success / failure result is a jackpot result, the occurrence frequency of the third character notice and the button notice is set to be high. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the result is an outlier, the frequency of occurrence of each notice effect is different for each attention type. If the result is a failure result, in the liquid crystal concentration type and the movable agent concentration type, the value of the notice counter RN is “90 to 94”, the third character notice is selected, and the value of the notice counter RN is “95”. Button notice is selected at “˜99”. In the nail concentration type, the third character notice is selected when the value of the notice counter RN is “80 to 89”, and the button notice is selected when the value of the notice counter RN is “90 to 99”. Here, as described above, when the success / failure result is a jackpot result, the value of the notice counter RN is “20 to 59”, the third character notice is selected, and the value of the notice counter RN is “60 to 99”. A notice is selected. In other words, if the third character notice and the button notice are generated, there is a possibility that a jackpot result will be obtained. Therefore, it can be said that the third character notice and the button notice are effects that can be expected for the jackpot result. Therefore, by increasing the occurrence frequency of the third character notice and the button notice that can be expected for the jackpot result, it is possible to notify the player that there is a high possibility that the result will be a jackpot result. It is possible to give a sense of security.

  Next, the value of the reach effect counter RD and the content of the reach effect are associated with each other when the value of the reach effect counter RD is “0 to 2” and the value of the normal effect and reach effect counter RD shown in FIG. 22 is an apocalyptic effect as shown in FIG. 22, and the reach effect counter RD is “6-8”, and the resurrection effect and reach effect counter RD is “9-64”. The effect of the intense heat system shown in 24, the value of the reach effect counter RD is “65 to 69”, the effect that only the small movable accessory 39a shown in FIG. 43A operates, and the value of the reach effect counter RD is “70˜ The small movable combination 39a and the medium movable combination 39b shown in FIG. 43 (b) operate, and the value of the reach production counter RD is “80 to 94” and the small movable combination shown in FIG. 43 (c). 39a, medium movable accessory 39b and large movable accessory 39c operate That effect, the value of the reach demonstration counter RD movable object unit 38 shown in FIG. 42 (b) in "95 to 99" is a demonstration that works. Here, when the success / failure result is a jackpot result, the generation frequency of the intense heat reach effect, the effect in which the movable accessories 39a, 39b, and 39c operate, and the effect in which the movable object unit 38 operates is set to be high. Yes. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the result is an outlier, the frequency of occurrence of each reach effect is different for each attention type. In addition, when the result is an unacceptable result, in the liquid crystal concentration type, the reach effect counter RD is “86 to 90” and the intense heat effect is selected, and the reach effect counter RD is “98” and the value is small. An effect in which the movable accessory 39a, the middle movable accessory 39b, and the large movable accessory 39c operate is selected, and an effect in which the movable object unit 38 operates with the value of the reach effect counter RD being “99” is selected. In the nail concentration type, the reach production counter RD value is “60 to 79” and the intense heat production is selected, and the reach production counter RD value is “98”, the small movable combination 39a, the middle movable combination 39b, An effect in which the large movable accessory 39c operates is selected, and an effect in which the movable object unit 38 operates with the value of the reach effect counter RD being “99” is selected. In the movable accessory concentration type, when the reach effect counter RD is “30 to 34”, the intense heat effect is selected, and when the reach effect counter RD is “90 to 96”, the small movable accessory 39a, An effect in which the movable accessory 39b and the large movable accessory 39c operate is selected, and an effect in which the movable object unit 38 operates when the value of the reach effect counter RD is “97 to 99” is selected. In other words, there is a possibility that a big hit result will be generated if there is an effect that the reach of the intense heat system, the effect that the movable objects 39a, 39b, and 39c operate, and the effect that the movable object unit 38 operates. It can be said that the effects, the effects in which the movable accessories 39a, 39b, and 39c operate, and the effects in which the movable object unit 38 operates are effects that can be expected from the jackpot result. Therefore, by increasing the frequency of the above-mentioned reach production that can be expected from the jackpot result, it is possible to notify the player that the result of the success / failure is likely to be a jackpot result, giving the player a sense of security. It becomes possible.

  Moreover, in the display continuation time in which the reach effect occurs, not only the result of the success / failure, but it is possible to generate the intense heat reach effect regardless of which display duration time is selected. In the present embodiment, the display duration is selected in the main MPU 83, and the reach effect is selected in the sound light MPU 93. Here, when the success / failure result is a jackpot result, if only a long display duration is selected in the display duration in which the reach effect occurs, the display duration in the short display duration in which the reach effect occurs is severe. Even if a thermal reach production occurs, it is not possible to expect a jackpot result. In other words, it can no longer be said that the intense heat-based reach production is a reach production that can be expected from the jackpot result. In this regard, according to the present configuration, when the result is a jackpot result, there is a possibility that a short display continuation time is selected from among the display continuation times when the reach effect occurs. Therefore, it is possible to expect the jackpot result for the intense heat type reach effect that occurs in the short display duration of the display duration in which the reach effect occurs. In addition, the display duration in which the reach effect occurs is not limited to the result of the success / failure, and any display duration time can be selected to generate an extremely hot reach effect. It is possible to adapt even if the generation frequency of the system reach production is different.

  Next, the gaming state notification table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46D is an explanatory diagram for explaining a gaming state notification table in the liquid crystal concentration system first jackpot reach lottery table. Here, the gaming state notification table is provided only in the lottery table in which the winning / failing result is a jackpot result. This is because the effect of notifying the game state is an effect that occurs only when the game result is a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (d), in the gaming state notification table, the numerical range of the gaming state notification counter RG and the content of the gaming state notification are set in a one-to-one correspondence. Further, the distribution of the numerical range of the gaming state notification counter RG and the content of the gaming state notification is different for each attention type. The content of the game state notification is determined by referring to the lottery table specified in step S603 of the main-side command response process (FIG. 15) and referring to the value of the game state notification counter RG in the process of step S606. The

  The association between the value of the gaming state notification counter RG and the content of the gaming state notification is the normal notification shown in FIG. 25 when the value of the gaming state notification counter RG is “0 to 33”, and the gaming state notification counter RG When the value is “34 to 66”, the advance notification shown in FIG. 26 is notified, and when the value of the gaming state notification counter RG is “67 to 99”, the promotion is notified as shown in FIG. The gaming state notification counter RG is provided in the lottery counter area of the sound light side RAM 95. Here, the size of the numerical range of the gaming state notification counter RG corresponding to the notification of each gaming state in the liquid crystal concentration type is the same. This is because the liquid crystal concentration type player is not particularly particular about the contents of the game state notification and wants to watch the notification of each game state in a balanced manner. Therefore, by making the occurrence frequency of each game state notification the same, it becomes possible to play the game for a long time without getting bored of the liquid crystal concentration type player. The gaming state notification counter RG is a loop counter that is updated at a short time interval, adds “1” to the previous value every time it is updated, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value “99”. .

  Here, although not shown, the distribution of the contents of the game state notification corresponding to the value of the game state notification counter RG in the attention type other than the liquid crystal concentration type will be described. First, in the case of the nail concentration type, the association between the value of the gaming state notification counter RG and the content of the gaming state notification is the normal notification shown in FIG. 25 when the value of the gaming state notification counter RG is “0 to 29”. When the value of the gaming state notification counter RG is “30 to 79”, the advance notification is shown in FIG. 26, and when the value of the gaming state notification counter RG is “80 to 99”, the promotion is shown in FIG. Compared to the liquid crystal concentration type, it is set so that the frequency of prior notifications is increased. As described above, the nail concentration type player is interested in the nail 59 provided on the game board 51. This is because a nail-concentrated player wants to know whether or not a game ball can easily enter the first operation port 54 by checking the nail 59 provided on the game board 51. Here, by increasing the occurrence frequency of the prior notice, the player's consciousness can be promptly directed to the symbol display device 61. As a result, it is possible to quickly reduce the consciousness that the game ball is unlikely to enter the first operation port 54.

  Next, in the case of the movable accessory concentration type, the value of the gaming state notification counter RG and the content of the gaming state notification are associated with each other when the value of the gaming state notification counter RG is “0 to 49” as shown in FIG. When the value of the gaming state notification counter RG is “50 to 59”, the advance notification shown in FIG. 26 is notified, and when the value of the gaming state notification counter RG is “60 to 99”, the promotion notification shown in FIG. Become. The frequency of promotion is set to be higher than that of the liquid crystal concentration type. Here, as described above, the player of the movable accessory concentration type is less interested in the reach effect displayed on the symbol display device 61, and the movable accessory unit 38 and the movable accessory 39a, 39b, 39c are not. be interested. Further, at the time of promotion, the movable object unit 38 and the movable accessories 39a, 39b, 39c operate. Therefore, by increasing the frequency of the promotion, the consciousness can be concentrated on the movable object unit 38 and the movable combination items 39a, 39b, and 39c even during the jackpot digestion round. Thereby, it becomes possible to play a long time without getting bored of the movable-object concentrated type player.

  In addition, an effect that has not been selected before the specified number of rotations can be selected. Specifically, a notice effect as shown in FIG. 44 occurs. Also, the content of the tutorial effect in the message notice is different after the specified number of rotations and before the specified number of rotations. The contents of the tutorial effect before the specified number of rotations explain the basic game contents of the pachinko machine 10, but after the specified number of rotations, the contents do not explain the basic game contents, but the pachinko machine 10 Applicable content is generated. The applied contents include contents for informing the effect that the expectation degree of jackpot is most expected and contents for informing the secret of the character. That is, by explaining the basic game content of the pachinko machine 10 up to the specified rotational speed, the player is informed of the game content of the pachinko machine 10, and after the specified rotational speed, By explaining the applied contents, it is possible to generate a tutorial notice corresponding to the degree of recognition of the pachinko machine 10. However, the method of notifying the player of the game contents of the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to the tutorial effect in the notice effect, and for example, a configuration in which an effect for displaying the tutorial is always displayed. In addition, a configuration in which the tutorial is not displayed when the specified rotational speed has elapsed, or a configuration in which the basic game content is not displayed may be employed.

<Method of identifying the direction of gaze during the game>
Next, a method for specifying the direction of the line of sight during the game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the direction of the player's line of sight during the game, and FIG. 47B is an explanatory diagram for explaining an event that the player is paying attention to during the game. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the player's line of sight in the game is an upward line of sight R5 for viewing the movable object unit 38 and the movable combination items 39a, 39b, 39c set at the upper part of the game board 51, and the symbol display. A straight line of sight R6 for viewing the effect displayed on the device 61 and a downward line of sight R7 for viewing the nail 59 near the first working port 54 are distinguished. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), the movable object unit 38 and the movable accessory 39a, 39b, 39c set in the upper part of the game board 51 are installed. The movable accessory installation range RA5, the symbol display device installation range RA6 in which the symbol display device 61 is installed, and the nail installation range RA7 in the vicinity of the first working port 54 and in which the nail 59 exists are distinguished.

<Point of interest determination processing>
Next, the point of interest determination process executed in step S511 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the sound light side MPU 93 will be described with reference to FIG. The point-of-interest determination process is a process that is performed in order to identify an event that the player has seen before the specified number of rotations and set an execution mode of an effect corresponding to the attention type corresponding to the identification result. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a point of interest determination process executed by the sound light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the value of the individual rotation number counter is a set value set in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. The set value is “30”, and the count of the specified rotational speed is started from the timing when “1” is set in the individual rotational speed flag in the process of step S1611 in the start type setting process (FIG. 41). If the determination in step S1701 is negative, the visible image data for one frame stored in the visible image storage area 95a provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1702 and the distance data stored in the distance data storage area 95b. It is determined whether or not it is time to use in the point of interest determination processing. This timing is after 10 msec from the previous processing timing. Here, as described above, the imaging cycle of the imaging device 73 is 4 msec. That is, the period in which the visible image data for one frame stored in the visible image storage area 95a and the distance data stored in the distance data storage area 95b are used in the point of interest determination processing is greater than the imaging period of the imaging device 73. Therefore, the same visible image as the previously referred visible image and the same distance data as the previously referred distance data are not referred to.

  If the determination in step S1702 is affirmative, it is determined in step S1703 whether or not “1” is set in any of the target point type flags provided in the sound light side RAM 95. The point-of-interest type flag refers to the liquid crystal concentration type flag, the nail concentration type flag, and the movable accessory concentration type flag described above. The target point type flag is set in a target point type setting process (FIG. 49) described later. The point-of-interest type setting process is a process for setting an attention type corresponding to an event that the player is paying attention to during the game. As described above, the attention point type flag is set to “1” when the attention type corresponding to the event that the player is paying attention to during the game is set. Thereafter, until the player is changed, the state in which the attention type corresponding to the event that the player is paying attention to during the game is set is maintained. Here, if the process of step S1703 is not provided, the point-of-interest type setting process is executed in a state where the attention type corresponding to the event that the player is paying attention to during the game is set. Therefore, by providing the processing, after the attention type corresponding to the event that the player is paying attention to during the game is set, the attention type corresponding to the event that the player is paying attention during the game is again set. It is possible to prevent the setting.

  If the determination in step S1703 is negative, it is determined in step S1704 whether or not “1” is set in the individual rotation number flag. As described above, the individual rotation number flag is a flag for causing the sound light side MPU 93 to specify that the player's attention type is set during the game. The individual rotation speed flag is set in the process of step S1611 of the start type setting process (FIG. 41). Specifically, the individual rotation number flag is set to “1” when the attention type corresponding to the attention type before and after sitting is set. Until the attention type corresponding to the event that the player is paying attention to during the game is set, “1” is set in the individual rotation number flag, and the attention type corresponding to the attention type before and after sitting is set. Is maintained. Here, if the process of step S1704 is not provided, the point-of-interest type setting process is executed in a state where the attention type corresponding to the attention type before and after sitting is not set. Therefore, by providing the process, it is possible to prevent the focused point type setting process from being executed in a state where the focused type corresponding to the focused type before and after sitting is not set.

  If the determination in step S1704 is affirmative, the point of interest type determination process is executed in step S1705. That is, the attention point type determination process is executed in a situation where the attention type set during the game is not set and the attention type set during the game is set. The attention point type determination process is performed to set the attention type according to the direction of the player's line of sight during the game. The point of interest type determination process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a point-of-interest type determination process executed by the sound light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S1801, the height position, the face direction, and the position of the pupil 300a captured this time are grasped. The specific processing content is the same as that in step S1002. In subsequent step S1802, the height position of the player's face specified in step S1801, the orientation of the player's face, and the position of the pupil 300a correspond to the symbol display device installation range RA6 set in the design stage. It is determined whether or not. The height position of the player's face, the orientation of the player's face, and the position of the pupil 300a corresponding to the symbol display device installation range RA6 are set at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10.

  If the determination in step S1802 is affirmative, “1” is added to the value of the liquid crystal continuous counter provided in the sound side RAM 95 in step S1803. The liquid crystal continuous counter is a counter for causing the sound light side MPU 93 to grasp that the player is continuously watching the liquid crystal. In step S1804, it is determined whether or not the addition condition of the liquid crystal counter provided in the sound side RAM 95 is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the liquid crystal continuous counter exceeds “50”. If the determination in step S1804 is affirmative, the value of the liquid crystal continuous counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S1805. By providing this processing, the value of the liquid crystal counter can be added at regular intervals. In subsequent step S1806, the value of the liquid crystal counter provided in the sound side RAM 95 is incremented by “1”. That is, when continuously watching the liquid crystal, the value of the liquid crystal counter is incremented by “1” every 0.5 sec.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1802, the value of the liquid crystal continuous counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S1807. In subsequent step S1808, whether or not the height position of the player's face specified in step S1801 and the orientation of the player's face and the position of the pupil 300a correspond to the nail installation range RA7 set in the design stage. Determine whether. The height position of the player's face corresponding to the nail installation range RA7, the orientation of the player's face, and the position of the pupil 300a are set at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10.

  If the determination in step S1808 is affirmative, “1” is added to the value of the nail continuous counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1809. The nail continuous counter is a counter for allowing the sound light side MPU 93 to grasp that the player is continuously watching a large number of nails 59 provided around the first operation port 54. In step S1810, it is determined whether the condition for adding the nail counter provided in the sound side RAM 95 is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the nail continuous counter exceeds “50”. If the determination in step S1810 is affirmative, the value of the nail continuous counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S1811. By providing the processing, it is possible to add the value of the nail counter at a constant interval. In subsequent step S1812, the value of the nail counter provided in the sound side RAM 95 is incremented by “1”. That is, when the nail 59 is continuously viewed, the value of the nail counter is incremented by “1” every 0.5 sec.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1808, the value of the nail continuous counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S1813. In subsequent step S1814, the height position of the player's face specified in step S1801, the orientation of the player's face, and the position of the pupil 300a correspond to the movable accessory installation range RA5 set in the design stage. It is determined whether or not. The height position of the player's face corresponding to the movable accessory installation range RA5, the orientation of the player's face, and the position of the pupil 300a are set at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10.

  If the determination in step S1814 is affirmative, “1” is added to the value of the movable accessory continuous counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1815. The movable accessory continuous counter is a counter for allowing the sound light side MPU 93 to grasp that the player is continuously watching the movable accessory unit 38 and the movable accessory 39a, 39b, 39c. In step S1816, it is determined whether or not the addition condition of the movable accessory counter provided in the sound side RAM 95 is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the movable accessory continuous counter exceeds “50”. If the determination in step S1816 is affirmative, the value of the movable accessory continuous counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S1817. By providing the processing, it is possible to add the value of the movable accessory counter at a constant interval. In subsequent step S1818, the value of the movable accessory counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is incremented by “1”. That is, when the movable object unit 38 and the movable combinations 39a, 39b, and 39c are continuously viewed, the value of the movable combination counter is incremented by “1” every 0.5 sec. If a negative determination is made in step S1814, the value of the movable accessory continuous counter is cleared to “0” in step S1819.

  Returning to the description of the point of interest determination process (FIG. 48), if an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, the individual rotation speed counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S1706, and the individual rotation speed flag is set. Clear “0”. In subsequent step S1707, a point of interest type setting process is executed. The point of interest type setting process will be described with reference to FIG. The point of interest type setting process refers to the value of the liquid crystal counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95, the value of the nail counter, and the value of the movable accessory counter, and sets the player's attention type after the specified number of rotations. This is a process performed for this purpose. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the point-of-interest type setting process executed by the sound light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the value of the liquid crystal counter provided in the sound side RAM 95 is equal to or greater than the values of other counters. The other counters are a nail counter and a movable accessory counter. If the determination in step S1901 is affirmative, “1” is set to the liquid crystal concentration flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1902. The liquid crystal concentration flag is a flag for causing the sound light side MPU 93 to specify that the player's attention type is a liquid crystal concentration type.

  In subsequent step S1903, the type table read to the sound light side RAM 95 in the start type setting process (FIG. 41) is erased, and the liquid crystal concentration type table is read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95. In the liquid crystal concentration type table, command types and lottery tables are set in a one-to-one correspondence. By reading the liquid crystal concentration type table from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95, a lottery table corresponding to the liquid crystal concentration type table can be read. Thereby, the execution mode of the production according to the liquid crystal concentration type is set.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1901, it is determined in step S1904 whether or not the value of the nail counter is greater than or equal to the value of the movable accessory counter. If the determination in step S1904 is affirmative, “1” is set to a nail concentration flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1905. The nail concentration flag is a flag for causing the sound light side MPU 93 to specify that the player's attention type is a nail concentration type.

  In subsequent step S1906, the type table read to the sound light side RAM 95 in the start type setting process (FIG. 41) is erased, and the nail concentration type table is read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95. By reading the nail concentration type table from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95, a lottery table corresponding to the nail concentration type table can be read. Thereby, the execution mode of the production according to the nail concentration type is set.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1904, “1” is set to the movable accessory concentration flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S1907. The movable accessory concentration flag is a flag for causing the sound light side MPU 93 to specify that the attention type of the player is the movable accessory concentration type.

  In subsequent step S1908, the type table read to the sound light side RAM 95 in the start type setting process (FIG. 41) is erased, and the movable accessory concentration type table is read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95. . By reading the movable accessory concentration type table from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95, a lottery table corresponding to the movable accessory concentration type table can be read. Thereby, the execution mode of the production according to the movable accessory concentration type is set.

  Here, the change of the type table is performed at the timing when the game rotation of the specified number of rotations (30 rotations) is completed, and is read from the game rotation of the 31st rotation by any one of steps S1903, S1906, and S1908. It becomes the execution mode of the production according to the type table.

  After executing any one of steps S1903, S1906, and S1908, the values of various counters are cleared to “0” in step S1909.

<Face recognition processing>
Next, the face authentication process in step S1209 of the post-seating determination process (FIG. 37) executed by the sound light side MPU 93 will be described with reference to FIG. The face authentication process is performed to specify whether the player who has left the seat and the player who has reappeared are the same person. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing face authentication processing executed by the sound light side MPU 93.

  First, face data extraction processing is executed in step S2001. Specifically, first, the visible image data for one frame is grasped based on the visible image data stored in the visible image storage area 95a of the sound side RAM 95, and the human face portion is included in the grasped visible image data. It is specified whether or not visible image data corresponding to is present. When specifying the person's face, a range corresponding to the contour portion of the face corresponding to an elliptical shape or a circular shape is extracted, and there is a range corresponding to the eyes, nose, mouth or ear in the extracted range. If it is, the extracted range is recognized as a face.

  In step S2002, it is determined whether or not face data extraction has been completed. If the determination in step S2002 is affirmative, face data storage processing is executed in step S2003. Specifically, the extracted face data is stored in a collation data storage area 95 d provided in the sound light side RAM 95.

  In subsequent step S2004, the face data stored in the pre-data storage area 95c of the sound light side RAM 95 is compared with the face data stored in the comparison data storage area 95d of the sound light side RAM 95. In this case, a jaw line is extracted from each face data, and the relative position of the eyes, nose, mouth or ear with respect to the jaw line and the outer edge shape of the eyes, nose, mouth or ear are 90% or more in both face data. If it is correct, it is determined that these two face data match. If face data can be authenticated, a specific method for authenticating the face data is arbitrary.

  In subsequent step S2005, it is determined whether or not the result of the collation process in step S2004 is a match result. The determination process is provided for different processing modes depending on whether the players before and after leaving the seat are the same. As described above, when the player's face data matches before and after leaving the seat, the attention type set before leaving the seat is inherited as it is. If the player's face data does not match before and after leaving the seat, the attention type set before leaving the seat is deleted and the attention type is set again.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2005, the values of various flags and various counters other than the pre-seat type flag provided in the second pre-seat type storage area set to “1” in step S2006 are cleared to “0”. The type table read to the optical RAM 95 is erased. Here, the sound light side RAM 95 is provided with the second pre-seat type storage area and the first pre-seat type storage area. The first pre-seating type storage area is an area for storing the player's pre-seating type before leaving, and is an area referred to in step S1601 of the start time setting process (FIG. 41). The second pre-seat type area is an area for storing a pre-seat type of a player who is seated in a chair placed in front of the pachinko machine 10 again. In both the first pre-seat type storage area and the second pre-seat type storage area, a pre-seat throwing flag, a pre-seat pro flag, a pre-seat amateur flag, and a pre-seat suspicion flag are provided. By providing step S2006, it becomes possible to set the attention type of the player who is seated again.

  In subsequent step S2007, the face data stored in the collation data storage area 95d is stored in the pre-data storage area 95c. When the face data stored in the collation data storage area 95d is stored in the pre-data storage area 95c, the face data stored in the collation data storage area 95d is deleted. This makes it possible to perform face authentication based on the face data of the player who is seated in the chair placed in front of the pachinko machine 10 again, and stores the face data for collation again in the collation data storage area 95d. It becomes possible.

  In the following step S2008, “1” is set in the pre-seat type flag provided in the first pre-seat type storage area which is the same as the pre-seat type flag provided in the second pre-seat type storage area and set to “1”. set. The reason for performing this process is that, as described above, the pre-seat type flag provided in the first pre-seat type storage area is referred to when the attention type at the start of the game is set. In addition, when “1” is set in the pre-seat type flag provided in the first pre-seat storage area, the pre-seat type flag provided in the second pre-seat storage area and set to “1” is cleared to “0”. Is done.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2005, the pre-seat type flag provided in the second pre-seat type storage area and set to “1” is cleared to “0” in step S2009. Here, when the attention type before sitting is set, and the player leaves before the attention type after sitting, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the attention type before sitting is set. . In addition, when the player who is seated in the chair again is the same as before leaving the seat, it can be considered that the player immediately sits in the chair. In this case, if two areas for storing the pre-sitting type are not provided, the pre-sitting throwing type is set. In addition, there is a sufficient possibility that the pre-sitting type before leaving the seat is not the above-mentioned pre-sitting type. The pre-seating type set before leaving the seat is more accurate than the pre-seating type set again after leaving the seat. This is because when the player who has left the seat selects the same pachinko machine 10 as before leaving, the player does not stare at the game history display unit 200 or the nail 59 provided on the game board 51 again. That is, by providing two areas for storing the pre-seating type, it is possible to maintain an accurate pre-seating type when the players before and after leaving the seat are the same. In step S2009, since the values of the various counters and the read type table are not erased, the game can be started in the state before leaving.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, one of the five attention types is set at the start of the game, and the execution mode of the effect according to the attention type is set within the specific period (within 30 rotations from the start of the game). . Thereby, it becomes possible to satisfy the needs for each attention type. Also, within the specific period, the attention type is set again according to the event that the player pays attention to, and the execution mode of the effect according to the attention type is set after the specific period. This makes it possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

  Further, the attention type (except for the normal type) set at the start of the game is set when the attention types before and after the seating match. Thereby, it is possible to increase the accuracy when setting the attention type.

  In addition, when the player's face is stored in advance and the player leaves the seat and the player sits again on the chair installed in front of the pachinko machine 10, the stored face data and A determination is made as to whether the face data captured this time matches, and if the determination matches, the state before leaving the seat can be taken over. On the other hand, if the determinations do not match, the values of various flags and various counters other than the pre-seat type flag of the player who is seated again are cleared to “0”, and the type table read to the sound side RAM 95 is read. Is erased. As a result, it is possible to erase the information of the player before leaving the seat, and it is possible to execute again the processing after the seating determination processing.

  Further, the event that the player is watching is specified by referring to the imaging result of the imaging device 73 by the height position of the player's face, the orientation of the player's face, and the position of the pupil 300a. Therefore, it is possible to specify an event that the player sees without contact.

  When the attention type is set, a type table corresponding to the set attention type is read to the sound light side RAM 95. Thereby, it is not necessary to read out the type table corresponding to the attention type set every time a command is transmitted from the main side MPU 83 to the sound side RAM 95.

  Further, when the notice effect and the reach effect are executed, the execution manner of the notice effect may be different from the predetermined change command and type command transmitted from the main MPU 83 to the sound light side MPU 93 and the reach effect. Although the execution mode may be different, the display duration of the game times is a time corresponding to the types of the change command and the type command. Therefore, the display continuation time determined by the main MPU 83 is not changed depending on the aspect of the notice effect and the aspect of the reach effect.

  Further, the execution mode of the effect is different before and after the specified rotational speed. Specifically, in the tutorial production, the basic game content of the pachinko machine 10 is described up to the specified rotational speed, but after the specified rotational speed, it is not the content explaining the basic game content, It changes to the content explaining the production which can expect the jackpot expectation most, the content explaining the secret of the character, and the like. As a result, it is possible to generate the contents of the production in accordance with the game level of the player.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the face data of the player facing the front with respect to the symbol display device 61 is stored before the game starts, and the event that the player pays attention to is identified with reference to the face data. . Unlike the first embodiment, the imaging substrate 71 is electrically connected to the main MPU 83 instead of the sound light MPU 93. The configuration of the imaging substrate 71 is the same as that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described in detail.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 52 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment.

  Unlike the block diagram (FIG. 8) showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the imaging substrate 71 is electrically connected to the input side and the output side of the main MPU 83. In accordance with the signal output from the main MPU 83, imaging is performed on the imaging substrate 71 and the imaging result is received by the main MPU 83.

  The main RAM 85 stores a reference visible image storage area 85d for storing a visible image for one frame before the game starts, and a reference distance data storage area 85e for storing the distance data of the player before the game starts. A visible image storage area 85f for storing a visible image for one frame during the game, and a distance data storage area 85g for storing the distance data of the player during the game.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The timer interrupt process executed while being repeated at a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec) in the main side MPU 83 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 83.

  Here, the processing from step S2101 to step S2118 is the same as the processing from step S201 to step S218. Further, the process of step S2119 is the same as the process of step S507. After the imaging control process is executed in step S2119, the viewpoint position specifying process is executed in step S2120, and the point of interest determination process is executed in step S2121. Specific contents of the viewpoint position specifying process and the point of interest determination process will be described in detail below.

<Viewpoint location processing>
Next, the viewpoint position specifying process executed in step S2120 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 53) of the main MPU 83 will be described with reference to FIGS. The viewpoint position specifying process is performed to store the face of the player facing the front with respect to the symbol display device 61. 54 is a flowchart showing the viewpoint position specifying process executed by the main MPU 83, and FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the viewpoint position specifying mark 128.

  First, in step S2201, the visible image data for one frame stored in the visible image storage area 85f provided in the main RAM 85 and the distance data stored in the distance data storage area 85g are used in the viewpoint position specifying process. It is determined whether or not it is time to perform. This timing is after 10 msec from the previous processing timing. Here, as described in the first embodiment, the imaging cycle of the imaging device 73 is 4 msec. In other words, the cycle in which the visible image data for one frame stored in the visible image storage area 85f and the distance data stored in the distance data storage area 85g are used in the viewpoint position specifying process is based on the imaging cycle of the imaging device 73. Therefore, the same visible image as the previously referred visible image and the same distance data as the previously referred distance data are not referred to.

  In step S2202, it is determined whether or not the operation handle 37b of the firing operation device 37 is being operated. Specifically, it is determined whether or not reception of a HI level condition establishment signal is started. If the determination in step S2202 is negative, it is determined in step S2203 whether or not there is a player seated by referring to the visible image data for one frame. The specific processing content is the same as the processing in step S904 of the pre-seating determination processing (FIG. 34).

  If the determination in step S2203 is affirmative, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not the viewpoint position flag is set to “1”. The viewpoint position flag is a flag for specifying that the main MPU 83 stores the player's face data before the launch operation. If a negative determination is made in step S2204, “1” is set to the viewpoint position flag in step S2205. In subsequent step S2206, a viewpoint position specifying command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The viewpoint position specifying command is a command for controlling the sound light side MPU 93 to display the viewpoint position specifying mark 128 on the symbol display device 61. The viewpoint position specifying mark 128 is a character displayed at the center of the symbol display device 61 as shown in FIG. By displaying the viewpoint position specifying mark 128 on the symbol display device 61, the player's face can be directed to the viewpoint position specifying mark 128. As a result, it is possible to image the player's face while looking at the viewpoint position specifying mark 128 (when facing the front of the symbol display device 61).

  If the determination in step S2204 is affirmative, it is determined in step S2207 whether 3 seconds have elapsed since the viewpoint position specifying mark 128 was displayed. In the present embodiment, a viewpoint position counter for measuring the time during which the viewpoint position specifying mark 128 is displayed is provided in the main RAM 85. In step S2207, it is determined whether or not the value of the viewpoint position counter is “300” or more. Here, even if the viewpoint position specifying mark 128 is displayed, the player does not always see the viewpoint position specifying mark 128 instantaneously. Therefore, it is possible to extract the face of the player who is facing the front with respect to the symbol display device 61 by extracting face data at a stage after a certain period of time has elapsed since the viewpoint position specifying mark 128 is displayed. It becomes possible.

If the determination in step S2207 is affirmative, the player's face data is extracted in step S2208. The specific processing content is the same as that in step S1301. In step S2209, it is determined whether face data extraction is completed. If the determination in step S2209 is affirmative, a face data storage process is executed in step S2210. Specifically, the visible image data of the extracted face is stored in a reference visible image storage area 85d provided in the main RAM 85, and the distance data is stored in a reference distance data storage area 85e provided in the main RAM 85.
The reference visible image storage area 85d is an area for storing the visible image data of the player facing the front with respect to the symbol display device 61 before the game is started. The reference distance data storage area 85e is an area for storing the distance data of the player facing the front with respect to the symbol display device 61 before the game is started. With reference to the visible image data stored in the reference visible image storage area 85d and the distance data stored in the reference distance data storage area 85e, an event to which the player pays attention is specified. Specific processing will be described later. In subsequent step S2211, the value of the viewpoint position counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0”.

<Characteristics for each type of attention set after the specified speed>
In the present pachinko machine 10, when a specified rotation speed (30 rotations) has elapsed since the game was started, an attention type corresponding to an event that the player has noticed up to the specified rotation speed is set. The features for each type of attention set after the specified rotational speed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining that the occurrence frequency of the liquid crystal effect is different for each type of attention set after the specified rotational speed, and FIG. 56 (b) is set after the specified rotational speed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating that the generation frequency of the production | presentation using the movable object unit 38 and movable accessory 39a, 39b, 39c differs for every attention type. Further, the operations of the movable object unit 38 and the movable accessories 39a, 39b, and 39c are the same as the operations shown in FIGS. 42 to 43 of the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (a), the attention types after the specified number of rotations are classified into three as in the first embodiment. Specifically, there are three types: a liquid crystal concentration type, a nail concentration type, and a movable accessory concentration type. One of the three attention types is set. Further, the frequency of occurrence of various effects generated after the specified number of rotations differs depending on the type of attention type. However, even if the frequency of occurrence of various effects differs for each type of attention, there is no difference in the degree of jackpot expectation. In other words, the jackpot expectation is the same regardless of which attention type is set. Hereinafter, specific features of the attention type will be described below.

  In the case of the liquid crystal concentration type, as shown in FIGS. The features of other attention types will be described with reference to the liquid crystal concentration type.

  In the case of the nail concentration type, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), the occurrence of the notice effect and the reach effect with a low jackpot expectation is higher than the liquid crystal concentration type, and conversely the occurrence of the notice effect and the reach effect with a high jackpot expectation is generated. The frequency is lower than the liquid crystal concentration type. In addition, the frequency of occurrence of the tutorial effect explaining the game content is higher than that of the liquid crystal concentration type, and the notification of the game state is characterized by a higher frequency of occurrence of a prior notice that makes it easy to determine whether or not the game state is correct. The display duration is set so that the ratio of the display duration is long and the ratio of the short duration is small compared to the liquid crystal concentration type. That is, it is possible to accumulate the number of holds in the situation where the production is occurring, and it is difficult to display the demonstration screen. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that a winning to the first operating port 54 which is a starting condition of the game round is likely to occur, and to prevent the player from being given a chance to stop the game, and to continue the game. It becomes possible. Further, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the nail concentration type is characterized in that the frequency of production using the movable object unit 38 and the movable accessories 39a, 39b, 39c is lower than that of the liquid crystal concentration type.

  In the case of the movable accessory concentration type, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), the occurrence frequency of the notice effect and the reach effect is lower than that of the liquid crystal concentration type. The movable object concentration type player rarely stares at the nail 59 provided on the symbol display device 61 or the game board 51, and tends to stare at the movable object unit 38 and the movable accessory 39a, 39b, 39c. is there. Therefore, there are few effects using the symbol display device 61, and the display duration time is often shorter and longer than the liquid crystal concentration type. The game state notification is characterized in that the frequency of promotion is higher than the liquid crystal concentration type. In addition, as shown in FIG. 56B, the movable accessory concentration type has a higher frequency of production using the movable object unit 38 and the movable accessories 39a, 39b, and 39c than the liquid crystal concentration type. This is because, as described above, the movable accessory concentration type player tends to stare at the movable object unit 38 and the movable accessory 39a, 39b, 39c during the game.

<Point of interest determination processing>
Next, the point of interest determination process executed in step S2121 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 53) of the main MPU 83 will be described. The point-of-interest determination process is performed in order to identify an event that the player is paying attention to by the specified number of rotations, and to set an execution mode of an effect according to the attention type corresponding to the identification result. In addition, the flow of a series of processes for setting the attention type during the game is the same as that of the first embodiment, but the contents of the attention point type determination process are different from those of the first embodiment. The point of interest type determination process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a point of interest type determination process executed by the main MPU 83.

  First, in step S2301, attention event identification processing is executed. The attention event identifying process is a comparison between the player's visible image data and distance data before the start of the game and the player's visible image data and distance data during the game, and is viewed by the player during the game. This is done to identify the event. The attention event specifying process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing attention event specifying processing executed by the main MPU 83.

  First, in step S2401, the height position of the player's face imaged this time, the position of the pupil 300a, the position of the forehead and the position of the chin are grasped. Specifically, first, the range recognized as a face is identified by referring to the visible image data stored in the visible image storage area 85f of the main RAM 85, and stored in the distance data storage area 85g of the main RAM 85. Distance data corresponding to the height position of the face is extracted. Next, the position of the pupil 300a existing in the range recognized as the face, the position of the forehead and the position of the chin are specified, and the pupil 300a, forehead and Extract distance data corresponding to the chin.

  In step S2402, the position of the pupil 300a, the position of the forehead, and the position of the chin in the reference face data are grasped. The method of specifying the position of the pupil 300a, the position of the forehead and the position of the chin in the reference face data is the same as in step S2401, but in this process, the reference visible image storage area 85d and the reference distance data storage area 85e are used. Refer to The distance data of each event extracted by the process becomes a reference value.

  In step S2403, the pupil 300a, forehead and chin distance data specified in step S2401 is compared with the pupil 300a, forehead and chin distance data specified in step S2402, and the deviation from the reference value ( (Distance data difference) is calculated.

  Returning to the description of the point-of-interest type determination process (FIG. 57), after executing the process of step S2301, in step S2302, the deviation in each event calculated in step S2301 and the height position of the player's face are It is determined whether or not the symbol display device installation range RA6 set in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 is applicable. In the pachinko machine 10, a symbol display device installation range RA6 is set in correspondence with the deviation of each event and the height position of the player's face.

  The processing in steps S2303 to S2307 is the same as the processing in steps S1803 to S1807 in the point of interest type setting processing (FIG. 49) of the first embodiment. In step S2308, it is determined whether or not the deviation of each event specified in step S2301 and the height position of the player's face correspond to the nail installation range RA7 set in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, a nail installation range RA7 is set corresponding to the shift of each event and the height position of the player's face.

  The processing from step S2309 to step S2313 is the same as the processing from step S1809 to step S1813 in the point of interest type determination processing (FIG. 49) of the first embodiment. In step S2314, it is grasped whether the deviation of each event specified in step S2301 and the height position of the player's face correspond to the movable accessory installation range RA5 set in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. To do. In the pachinko machine 10, a movable accessory installation range RA5 is set in correspondence with the deviation of each event and the height position of the player's face. The processing from step S2315 to step S2319 is the same as the processing from step S1815 to step S1819 in the point of interest type determination processing (FIG. 49) of the first embodiment.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  According to this embodiment, the viewpoint position specifying mark 128 is displayed at the center of the symbol display device 61 before the game starts. Since the character appearing on the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the viewpoint position specifying mark 128, the player's face can be directed to the viewpoint position specifying mark 128 in a natural manner, and the player can It is possible to image a face when the position specifying mark 128 is viewed from the front. As a result, it is possible to accurately grasp the face data of the player who is looking in front of the symbol display device 61 in a natural manner.

  In addition, the positions of the pupil 300a, the forehead and the chin of the player who is looking in front of the symbol display device 61 before the start of the game are used as reference values, and the positions of the pupil 300a, the forehead and the chin of the player imaged this time The difference from the reference value is specified. Then, by referring to the difference from the reference value and the height position of the player's face, the event that the player is paying attention to is specified. Thereby, it becomes possible to improve the precision which pinpoints the event which a player pays attention to.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a communication means capable of data communication. The configuration will be described below.

<Electrical configuration related to communication means>
The electrical configuration relating to the communication means will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration relating to the communication means.

  Each pachinko machine 10 includes a communication interface as a communication means that enables bidirectional data communication with the outside, and is connected by a communication line 130. Thereby, it becomes possible to communicate between the pachinko machines 10.

  When the player is watching the reach effect occurring in the left or right pachinko machine 10 during the game, a command (effect request command) for specifying the content of the generated reach effect is the communication line 130. To the pachinko machine 10 being viewed by the player. Then, the pachinko machine 10 that has received the effect request command grasps the content of the generated reach effect and generates a command (effect providing command) for providing the content of the generated reach effect via the communication line 130. The request command is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 that has transmitted it. Thereby, it is possible to generate the same reach effect as the reach effect generated in the left or right pachinko machine 10 in the pachinko machine 10 in which the player is playing.

<Direction request processing>
Next, an effect request process performed after the process of step S507 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the sound light side MPU 93 will be described with reference to FIG. The effect request process is performed in order to display the reach effect generated in the left or right pachinko machine 10 viewed by the player in the game on the pachinko machine 10 in the game. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an effect request process executed by the sound light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the operation handle 37b of the firing operation device 37 is operated. The specific processing content is the same as the processing in step S1201 of the post-seating determination processing (FIG. 37).

  If the determination in step S2501 is affirmative, the visible image data for one frame stored in the visible image storage area 95a provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S2502 and the distance data stored in the distance data storage area 95b. It is determined whether or not it is time to use in the effect request process. This timing is after 10 msec from the previous processing timing. Here, as described in the first embodiment, the imaging cycle of the imaging device 73 is 4 msec. That is, the period in which the visual image data for one frame stored in the visible image storage area 95a and the distance data stored in the distance data storage area 95b are used in the effect request process is greater than the imaging period of the imaging device 73. Since it is set to be long, the same visible image as the previously referenced visible image and the same distance data as the previously referred distance data are not referred to.

  If the determination in step S2502 is affirmative, the height position, the face direction, and the position of the pupil 300a captured this time in step S2503 are grasped. Specifically, first, the visible image data for one frame is grasped based on the visible image data stored in the visible image storage area 95a of the sound side RAM 95, and the human face portion is included in the grasped visible image data. It is specified whether or not visible image data corresponding to is present. When specifying the person's face, a range corresponding to the contour portion of the face corresponding to an elliptical shape or a circular shape is extracted, and there is a range corresponding to the eyes, nose, mouth or ear in the extracted range. If it is, the extracted range is recognized as a face. Then, the height position of the face is grasped from the distance data stored in the distance data storage area 95b of the sound side RAM 95.

  Next, the direction of the player's face is specified. Specifically, the positions of the left and right ears existing within the range recognized as the face are specified, and the left and right ears stored in the distance data storage area 95b of the sound side RAM 95 are supported. Distance data to be extracted. When only the range corresponding to the left ear exists with reference to the visible image data, the player's face is facing the left side when viewed from the pachinko machine 10 side. When only the range corresponding to the right ear exists with reference to the visible image data, the player's face is facing the right side when viewed from the pachinko machine 10 side. Even when only one ear exists, distance data corresponding to the existing ear is extracted.

  Next, the player's line of sight is detected. Specifically, a position on the cornea (corneal reflection) of reflected light generated by irradiating near infrared rays is set as a reference point 300d, and a line of sight is detected based on the position of the pupil 300a with respect to the position of the reference point 300d. Here, if the pupil 300a is closer to the eye than the reference point 300d, the player looks at the left side. If the pupil 300a is closer to the eye than the reference point 300d, the player looks at the right side. Will be.

  In the subsequent step S2504, the left pachinko machine staring (not shown) in which the height position of the player's face, the player's face orientation, and the position of the pupil 300a specified in step S2503 are set in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 is determined. It is determined whether it falls within the range. The height position of the player's face, the orientation of the player's face, and the position of the pupil 300a corresponding to the left pachinko machine gaze range are set at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10.

  If the determination in step S2504 is affirmative, “1” is added to the value of the left line-of-sight continuous counter provided in the sound side RAM 95 in step S2505. The left line-of-sight continuous counter is a counter for causing the sound light side MPU 93 to grasp that the player is continuously watching the left pachinko machine 10. In step S2506, it is determined whether or not the addition condition of the left line-of-sight counter provided in the sound side RAM 95 is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the left line-of-sight continuous counter exceeds “50”. If the determination in step S2506 is affirmative, the value of the left line-of-sight continuous counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S2507. By providing the processing, it is possible to add the value of the left eye gaze counter at a constant interval. In the subsequent step S2508, the value of the left line-of-sight counter provided in the sound side RAM 95 is incremented by “1”. That is, when the left pachinko machine 10 is continuously viewed, the value of the left visual line counter is incremented by “1” every 0.5 sec.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2504, the value of the left visual line continuous counter and the value of the left visual line counter are cleared to “0” in step S2509. In the subsequent step S2510, the right pachinko machine staring (not shown) in which the height position of the player's face, the player's face orientation and the position of the pupil 300a specified in step S2503 are set in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 is determined. It is determined whether it falls within the range. The height position of the player's face, the orientation of the player's face, and the position of the pupil 300a corresponding to the right pachinko machine gaze range are set at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10.

  If the determination in step S2510 is affirmative, “1” is added to the value of the right line-of-sight continuous counter provided in the sound side RAM 95 in step S2511. The right gaze continuous counter is a counter for causing the sound light side MPU 93 to grasp that the player is continuously watching the right pachinko machine 10. In step S 2512, it is determined whether or not the addition condition of the right gaze counter provided in the sound side RAM 95 is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the right line-of-sight continuous counter exceeds “50”. If the determination in step S2512 is affirmative, the value of the right line-of-sight continuous counter provided in the sound light side RAM 95 is cleared to “0” in step S2513. By providing this processing, it is possible to add the value of the right eye gaze counter at a constant interval. In the subsequent step S2514, the value of the right line-of-sight counter provided in the sound side RAM 95 is incremented by “1”. That is, when the right pachinko machine 10 is continuously viewed, the value of the right line-of-sight counter is incremented by “1” every 0.5 sec. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2510, the value of the right line-of-sight continuous counter and the value of the right line-of-sight counter are cleared to “0” in step S2515.

  When step S2506 is negatively determined, when step S2508 is executed, when step S2512 is negatively determined, or when step S2514 is executed, the value of the left eye gaze counter or the value of the right eye gaze counter is determined in the design stage in step S2516. It is determined whether or not the set value is not less than the set value. As the setting value, “6” is set. In other words, an affirmative determination is made when the player is watching the left or right pachinko machine 10 continuously for 3 seconds or more. Here, there is a possibility that the player may see the left or right pachinko machine 10 even if he is not interested (for example, when the sound or sound output from the speaker unit 24 is loud). In that case, it is considered that the time to see either the left or right pachinko machine 10 is instantaneous. By providing the processing of step S2516, it is possible to generate only the reach effect that the player is interested in in the pachinko machine 10 in which the player is playing.

  If the determination in step S2516 is affirmative, an effect request command is transmitted to the left or right pachinko machine 10 viewed by the player via the communication line 130 in step S2517. The effect request command is a command for specifying that the player is watching the left or right pachinko machine 10.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the same reach effect is generated in the pachinko machine 10 during the game only when the effect that the player is viewing is the reach effect. In other words, even if the player sees an effect other than the reach effect generated by the left or right pachinko machine 10, the effect does not occur at the pachinko machine 10 in which the player is playing. In subsequent step S2518, the values of the line-of-sight counter and the line-of-sight continuous counter are cleared to “0”.

<Direction command processing>
Next, an effect command response process performed after the effect request process (FIG. 60) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the sound light side MPU 93 will be described with reference to FIG. The effect command handling process is performed to perform a process corresponding to a command transmitted / received via the communication line 130. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an effect command response process executed by the sound light side MPU 93.

  First, it is determined in step S2601 whether an effect request command has been received. If the determination in step S2601 is affirmative, it is determined in step S2602 whether or not a reach effect has occurred in the symbol display device 61. Specifically, at the timing when the presentation request command is received, after the command transmitted to the display control device 96 at the start of normal reach or at the start of super reach, the command transmitted to the display control device 96 at the end of the change It is determined whether or not the situation is not transmitted. In the pachinko machine 10, a command is transmitted to the display control device 96 at the start of normal reach, at the start of super reach, and at the end of change. By providing the process, it is possible to specify that the effect that the player is viewing is the reach effect, and only when the reach effect is occurring, the command storing the contents of the reach effect can be transmitted. It becomes possible.

  In subsequent step S2603, the contents of the reach effect stored in the sound side RAM 95 are grasped. The reach effect is the normal system, apology system, resentment system, and intense heat system shown in FIGS. In step S2604, an effect providing command is transmitted via the communication line 130 to the pachinko machine 10 that has transmitted the effect request command. The effect providing command is a command for causing the pachinko machine 10 that the player is playing to specify the content of the reach effect that the player is viewing, and information on reach effect is set.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2601, it is determined in step S2605 whether an effect providing command has been received. If the determination in step S2605 is affirmative, the effect providing command is stored in the effect storage area provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S2606. The effect storage area is an area for storing the received effect providing command.

<Main command processing>
Next, the main-side command response processing executed in step S503 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) of the sound light side MPU 93 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing main-side command response processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 93 in the third embodiment.

  The processing from step S2701 to step S2705 is the same as the processing from step S601 to step S605. After the stop symbol determination process is executed in step S2705, it is determined in step S2706 whether or not an effect providing command is stored in the effect storage area provided in the sound side RAM 95. By providing the process, it is possible to make the process for determining the effect pattern different when the effect providing command is stored in the effect storage area and when it is not.

  If the determination in step S2706 is affirmative, it is determined in step S2707 whether or not a reach effect is generated in the current game round. Specifically, the presence / absence of the reach effect is specified from the contents of the change command transmitted from the main MPU 83. If the determination in step S2707 is affirmative, it is determined in step S2708 whether or not the reach effect stored in the effect providing command can be generated within the display duration of the current game time. Specifically, the display duration of the game times is first identified from the contents of the variation command and the type command received this time. Here, in this pachinko machine 10, it is assumed that the time during which the reach effect can be generated by specifying the display duration time is also specified. Moreover, in this pachinko machine 10, the time for generating the reach effect is specified by specifying the content of the reach effect. Since the effect providing command stores reach effect information, it is possible to specify the reach effect time that the player was watching.

  If the reach effect time generated this time and the reach effect time stored in the effect providing command are the same, the reach effect stored in the effect providing command may be generated as it is. Also, if the reach effect to be generated this time is longer than the reach effect time stored in the effect providing command, the symbol swing period after generating the reach effect stored in the effect providing command is lengthened. Then, adjust the reach production time. Further, when the reach effect generated this time is shorter than the reach effect time stored in the effect providing command, the reach effect stored in the effect providing command is not generated.

  If the determination in step S2708 is affirmative, an effect pattern determination process in the case where the reach effect generated in the left or right pachinko machine 10 viewed by the player in step S2709 is executed. Specifically, an effect pattern corresponding to the combination of the reach effect information stored in the effect providing command, the display duration information, and the game result information specified in step S2702 is selected.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2706, a negative determination is made in step S2707, or a negative determination is made in step S2708, a normal effect pattern determination process is executed in step S2710. The specific processing content is the same as that in step S606. Here, in the situation where the production providing command is stored in the production storage area and there is no occurrence of reach production in the current game round, it corresponds to the combination including the information on the reach production stored in the production providing command. The production pattern is not selected. Thereby, even if the effect providing command is stored in the effect storage area, the reach effect similar to the reach effect that the player was watching does not occur in the game times where the reach effect does not occur. That is, it is possible to prevent the contradiction that the reach effect occurs in the game times where the reach effect does not occur. In addition, even when the reach effect to be generated this time is shorter than the reach effect time stored in the effect providing command, there is an effect pattern corresponding to the combination including the reach effect information stored in the effect providing command. Not selected. In addition, when the reach effect that the player was watching in the current game round cannot be generated, the information of the effect providing command stored in the effect storage area is not erased. That is, it is possible to store the contents of the reach effect that the player was watching until the time when the reach effect that the player was watching can be generated. The processing from step S2711 to step S2714 is the same as the processing from step S607 to step S610.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  According to this embodiment, when it is determined that the player is staring at the reach performance of the left or right pachinko machine 10, the player is staring at the pachinko machine 10 from the pachinko machine 10 being played. In response to this, an effect request command is transmitted. The pachinko machine 10 that has received the effect request command transmits an effect providing command to the pachinko machine 10 being played by the player. Thereby, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the player is playing, it is possible to generate a reach effect similar to that generated in the pachinko machine 10 that the player was staring at. In addition, since the reach effect that the player is interested in is forcibly generated in the pachinko machine 10 in which the player is playing, it is possible to surely generate the effect that the player is interested in and execute the game for a long time. It becomes possible to make it.

  In addition, when the player stares at the left or right pachinko machine 10 continuously for a set time or longer, the above-mentioned presentation providing command is transmitted to either the left or right pachinko machine 10 at which the player stares. The Here, if the sound or sound output from the speaker unit 24 of the left or right pachinko machine 10 is loud, the player may watch the left or right pachinko machine 10 even if he is not interested. In this case, the viewing time is considered to be a moment. In this regard, in the present configuration, the above-mentioned presentation providing command is transmitted only when staring at the left or right pachinko machine 10 continuously for a set time or longer, so that the player is surely identified the stage of interest. It becomes possible to do.

  Further, even when an effect providing command is received, a reach effect is not generated in the current game time, or a reach effect time generated in the current game time is shorter than a reach effect time stored in the effect providing command. In this case, the reach effect stored in the effect providing command is not set. Therefore, the reach effect is not forcibly generated and the reach effect is not forcibly lengthened. Further, in order to forcibly generate the reach effect stored in the effect providing command, it is not necessary to process the reach effect stored in the effect providing command. As a result, it is possible to prevent an effect that is particularly interesting to the player from being lost in the reach effect.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the timing for capturing the face of the player facing the front with respect to the symbol display device 61 is different from that in the second embodiment. In addition, the reference visible image storage area 85d and the reference distance data storage area 85e provided in the main side RAM 85 of the second embodiment are provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described in detail.

<Reach production that you can expect from jackpot>
First, the reach effect which can be expected in the jackpot in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the intense heat reach effect.

  In the intense heat system reach effect in the present embodiment, after reaching, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the background of the symbol display device 61 is blacked out and the eyes are closed as shown in FIG. 63 (b). Are displayed in full on the symbol display device 61. A few seconds after the face of the character with closed eyes is displayed, as shown in FIG. 63C, the eyes of the character are opened, and a “burning” character is displayed on the face of the character. Since the game result is a game result in which the result of the success / failure determination process is an outlier result, the combination of the same symbols is not finally stopped and displayed on one line as shown in FIG. 63 (d).

<Type table and data table>
In the present embodiment, when the player is changed or when the pachinko machine 10 is played at the beginning when the power is turned on, an initial normal type table described later is read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95. . Further, in the present embodiment, when the intense heat reach effect is generated in the state where the initial normal type table is set, whether or not the player's face data has been acquired in the generation period of the intense heat reach effect. The determination process is performed. When the player's face data cannot be acquired during the period of occurrence of the intense heat reach effect, a balance type normal type table to be described later is read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95.

  Further, even when the player's face data can be acquired during the period of occurrence of the intense heat reach effect, the balance type normal type table is read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95. And the said balance type | mold normal type table is erase | eliminated after digestion with regulation rotation speed (30 rotations). Further, after digesting the prescribed rotational speed, a point-of-interest type table corresponding to an event that the player has noticed before digesting the prescribed rotational speed is read from the acoustic light side ROM 94 to the acoustic light side RAM 95. The point-of-interest type table is a liquid crystal concentration type table, a nail concentration type table, and a movable accessory concentration type table as described above. The initial normal type table and the balance normal type table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64A is an explanatory diagram for explaining an initial normal type table.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (a), in the initial normal type table, a command type and a lottery table are provided in a one-to-one correspondence. The lottery table includes a notice lottery table, a reach production lottery table, and a gaming state notification table. However, the reach production lottery table and the game state notification table are not provided in the lottery table when the reach production does not occur. In addition, the game state notification table is not provided in the lottery table in the case where the reach effect is generated but the result of the success / failure is a result of losing. Similarly to the initial normal type table, the balance type normal type table is also provided with a command type and a lottery table in a one-to-one correspondence.

  Next, the difference in correspondence between the reach effect counter RD and the reach effect content in the initial normal type table and the balance normal type table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64B is an explanatory diagram for explaining that the distribution of the numerical range of the reach effect counter RD is different between the initial normal type table and the balance normal type table. Here, the initial normal first outreach lottery table and the balance type normal first outreach lottery table will be described as examples.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (b), the correspondence between the numerical range of the reach effect counter RD and the content of the reach effect in the initial normal type table is shown in FIG. 21 with the value of the reach effect counter RD being "0 to 4". Normal production, reach production counter RD is “5-9” and apology production shown in FIG. 22, reach production counter RD is “10-14”, production production, reach shown in FIG. 63. When the value of the effect counter RD is “15 to 95”, the effect of the intense heat system shown in FIG. 63, and when the value of the reach effect counter RD is “96”, only the small movable accessory 39a shown in FIG. 43. When the reach effect counter RD is “97” and the small movable accessory 39a and the middle movable accessory 39b shown in FIG. 43B operate, the reach effect counter RD is “98” and the value shown in FIG. ) Small movable accessory 39a shown in Production which middle movable won game 39b and the large movable won game 39c is operated, the value of the reach demonstration counter RD movable object unit 38 shown in FIG. 42 (b) by "99" has become a demonstration to operate.

  The situation in which the initial normal type table is read to the sound side RAM 95 is, as described above, when the player is changed, or when the pachinko machine 10 is played first at the time of power-on. is there. In addition, when the game is started, it is preferable to quickly acquire the player's face data. This is because if it takes time to acquire the player's face data, there is a risk that the game will be stopped before setting the performance execution mode corresponding to the player's attention type. Here, in the case where the success / failure result is a jackpot result, the occurrence frequency of the intense heat reach effect is set to be higher than in the case where the success / failure result is a failure result. In other words, since the intense heat-based reach production can be expected to be a big hit, the player is very likely to stare at the intense heat-based reach production. Therefore, by increasing the occurrence frequency of the intense heat reach effect that can be expected in the jackpot, it is possible to increase the chances of causing the player to pay attention to the symbol display device 61. This makes it possible to quickly acquire the player's face data.

  Next, associating the numerical range of the reach effect counter RD with the contents of the reach effect in the balanced normal type table, the value of the reach effect counter RD is “0 to 27” and the normal effect and reach shown in FIG. When the value of the effect counter RD is “28 to 56”, the apology effect shown in FIG. 22, the value of the reach effect counter RD is “57 to 85”, and when the value of the reach effect counter RD is shown in FIG. Production of intense heat shown in FIG. 63 by “86 to 90”, reach production counter RD having a value of “91 to 94”, an effect in which only the small movable accessory 39a shown in FIG. Production with the RD value “95 to 97” and the small movable combination 39a and the middle movable combination 39b shown in FIG. 43 (b), and the reach production counter RD value “98” in FIG. 43 (c). Small movable character 3 shown a, production which middle movable won game 39b and the large movable won game 39c is operated, the movable object unit 38 shown in FIG. 42 (b) the value of the reach demonstration counter RD is "99" is a demonstration that works.

  Here, the situation where the balance type normal type table is being read into the sound light side RAM 95 is, as described above, when the player's face data cannot be acquired in the generation period of the intense heat reach effect, Alternatively, after the player's face data is acquired in the generation period of the intense heat reach effect, the specified rotation speed is consumed. Further, in the present embodiment, in the situation where the initial normal type table is read out, it becomes a reference that is referred to when identifying an event that the player pays attention to in the game only when the intense heat reach effect occurs. The player's face data extraction process is not executed. That is, it is not necessary to extract the player's face data as a reference in a situation where the balance type normal type table is read out to the sound light side RAM 95. In addition, if the intense heat reach effect frequently occurs in the game times in which the result of the success / failure is a result, the player may feel stress. Therefore, by reducing the occurrence frequency of the intense heat reach effect that can be expected for the jackpot result, it is possible to suppress the frustration of the player.

  Moreover, in the display continuation time in which the reach effect occurs, not only the result of the success / failure, but it is possible to generate the intense heat reach effect regardless of which display duration time is selected. In the present embodiment, the display duration is selected in the main MPU 83, and the reach effect is selected in the sound light MPU 93. Here, when the success / failure result is a jackpot result, if only a long display duration is selected in the display duration in which the reach effect occurs, the display duration in the short display duration in which the reach effect occurs is severe. Even if a thermal reach production occurs, it is not possible to expect a jackpot result. In other words, it can no longer be said that the intense heat-based reach production is a reach production that can be expected from the jackpot result. In this regard, according to the present configuration, when the result is a jackpot result, there is a possibility that a short display continuation time is selected from among the display continuation times when the reach effect occurs. Therefore, it is possible to expect the jackpot result for the intense heat type reach effect that occurs in the short display duration of the display duration in which the reach effect occurs. In addition, the display duration in which the reach effect occurs is not limited to the result of the success / failure, and any display duration time can be selected to generate an extremely hot reach effect. It is possible to adapt even if the generation frequency of the system reach production is different.

<Player determination process>
First, the player determination process performed after the process of step S507 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the sound light side MPU 93 will be described with reference to FIG. The player determination process is a process that is performed to specify whether or not the player before and after leaving the seat is the same person, and to change the subsequent processes depending on the result. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a player determination process executed by the sound light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S2801, the visible image data for one frame stored in the visible image storage area 95a provided in the sound side RAM 95 and the distance data stored in the distance data storage area 95b are used in the player determination process. It is determined whether it is the timing to use. This timing is after 10 msec from the previous processing timing. Here, as described above, the imaging cycle of the imaging device 73 is 4 msec. That is, the period in which the visible image data for one frame stored in the visible image storage area 95a and the distance data stored in the distance data storage area 95b are used in the player determination process is greater than the imaging period of the imaging device 73. Therefore, the same visible image as the previously referred visible image and the same distance data as the previously referred distance data are not referred to.

  If the determination in step 2801 is affirmative, it is determined in step S2802 whether or not the player is seated. The specific processing content is the same as the processing in step S904 of the pre-seating determination processing (FIG. 34).

  If the determination in step S2802 is affirmative, it is determined in step S2803 whether or not visible image data is stored in the prior data storage area 95c provided in the sound light side RAM 95. The pre-data storage area 95c is an area provided in the sound light side RAM 95 for storing visible image data of the face of a player seated on a chair placed in front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, since the face data stored in the pre-data storage area 95c is erased when the power is cut off, it is necessary to store the player's face data in the pre-data storage area 95c again at power-on. In step S2803, a negative determination is made when a player appears in front of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of power-on, and a positive determination is made when the player's face data is stored in the pre-data storage area 95c.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2803, the processes in steps S2804 to S2806 are executed. The specific processing content is the same as the processing in steps S1301 to S1303 of the face storage processing (FIG. 38).

  After executing the process of step S2806, the initial normal type table is read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95 in step S2807. As described above, the command type and the lottery table are provided in a one-to-one correspondence in the initial normal type table. That is, the lottery table corresponding to the initial normal type table can be read by reading the initial normal type table. Thereby, it becomes possible to set the execution mode of the production corresponding to the initial normal type table. Further, as described above, the reach production lottery table provided in the initial normal type table is set so that the occurrence frequency of the intense heat-type reach production is increased. Since the intense heat reach production can be expected to be a big hit, the player is likely to pay attention to the intense heat reach production. Therefore, when the player starts playing the pachinko machine 10, it becomes possible to quickly extract the player's face data as a reference.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2803, processing in steps S2808 to S2812 is executed. The specific processing content is the same as the processing in steps S2001 to S2005 of the face authentication processing (FIG. 51). If the determination in step S2812 is negative, the values of various flags and counters are cleared to “0” in step S2813, and a reference visible image storage area and a reference distance data storage area (not shown) provided in the sound light side RAM 95 are displayed. to erase. The reference visible image storage area is an area in which visible image data that is referred to when identifying an event that the player is paying attention to during the game is stored. The reference distance data storage area is an area in which distance data that is referred to when identifying an event that the player is paying attention to during the game is stored. As a result, when the players are different before and after leaving the seat, it is possible to store new player data by erasing various data of the player before leaving the seat. In step S2813, the type table read to the sound light side RAM 95 is erased, and the initial normal type table is read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95. Thereby, when a new player starts a game of the pachinko machine 10, it becomes possible to quickly extract the player's face data as a reference.

  After executing the process of step S2813, the face data in the verification data storage area 95d is stored in the pre-data storage area 95c in step S2814. When the face data stored in the collation data storage area 95d is stored in the pre-data storage area 95c, the face data stored in the collation data storage area 95d is deleted. This makes it possible to perform face authentication based on the face data of the player who is seated in the chair placed in front of the pachinko machine 10 again, and stores the face data for collation again in the collation data storage area 95d. It becomes possible.

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S2812 is affirmative, the player determination process is terminated as it is. That is, when the players are the same before and after leaving the seat, various data set before leaving the seat are maintained as they are. Thereby, since the execution mode of the production corresponding to the player's attention type is maintained, it is possible to promptly generate each production in the execution mode of the performance corresponding to the player's attention type.

<Reference face data identification processing>
Next, the reference face data specifying process performed after the player determination process in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the sound light side MPU 93 will be described with reference to FIG. The reference face data identification process is to determine whether or not the player's face can be imaged during a period in which the intense reach-type reach effect occurs and the player is imaged during the period in which the intense heat-type reach effect occurs. This process is performed to make subsequent processes different. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the reference face data specifying process executed by the sound light side MPU 93.

  First, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the intense heat reach effect shown in FIG. 63 has occurred. Specifically, it is determined by referring to the data table whether or not it is a period in which the intense heat reach effect is occurring. Further, as described above, in this embodiment, in the situation where the initial normal type table is read out, the extraction process of the player's face data serving as a reference is performed only when the intense heat reach effect occurs. Therefore, by providing the process of step S2901, it becomes possible to prevent the extraction process of the player's face data as a reference when the reach effect other than the intense heat system occurs.

  If the determination in step S2901 is affirmative, the visible image data for one frame stored in the visible image storage area 95a provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in step S2902 and the distance data stored in the distance data storage area 95b. It is determined whether or not it is the timing to use in the reference face data specifying process. This timing is after 10 msec from the previous processing timing. Here, as described above, the imaging cycle of the imaging device 73 is 4 msec. That is, the cycle in which the visible image data for one frame stored in the visible image storage area 95a and the distance data stored in the distance data storage area 95b are used in the reference face data specifying process is the imaging cycle of the imaging device 73. Therefore, the same visible image as the previously referenced visible image and the same distance data as the previously referred distance data are not referred to.

  If the determination in step S2902 is affirmative, it is determined in step S2903 whether or not the initial normal type table has been read into the sound light side RAM 95. The initial normal type table is used when the player's face data is stored in the pre-data storage area 95c in a situation where the player's face data is not stored in the pre-data storage area 95c, or before and after leaving the seat. If they are different, they are read out to the sound light side RAM 95. Further, as described above, in this embodiment, in the situation where the initial normal type table is read out, the extraction process of the player's face data serving as a reference is performed only when the intense heat reach effect occurs. Therefore, by providing the processing of step S2903, in the situation where a type table other than the initial normal type table is read into the sound side RAM 95, the extraction process of the player's face data serving as a reference is not performed. It becomes possible to do.

  If the determination in step S2903 is affirmative, it is determined in step S2904 whether or not the most flashy production has been completed among the intense heat reach production. By providing the processing, it is possible to cause the sound light side MPU 93 to grasp that the most flashy production in the intense heat reach production has ended. Among the intense heat-based reach productions, the most flashy production is as shown in FIG. 63 (c), with the background of the symbol display device 61 being blacked out, the character's eyes open, and “ It is an effect in which the characters “Scorching” are displayed. Specifically, in this process, it is determined whether or not the pointer information corresponds to the data at the end of the effect shown in FIG. As described above, pointer information corresponding to the number of update timings of the production corresponding to the display duration time of the target game times is set in the data table. Information on whether or not commands are output is set. Information on the contents of the task includes the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 23 corresponding to the current game round, the sound output control of the speaker unit 24, the driving of the movable object unit driving unit 38c and the movable accessory driving units 39d, 39e, and 39f. This is information set for performing control, and processing corresponding to information on the contents of the task is performed at the update timing of each effect. At the end of the effect shown in FIG. 63 (c), the speaker unit 24 outputs a sound corresponding to the end of the effect shown in FIG. 63 (c).

  Returning to the description of the reference face data specifying process (FIG. 66), if a negative determination is made in step S2904, a face data extraction process is executed in step S2905. The specific processing content is the same as that in step S1301. In a succeeding step S2906, it is determined whether or not the face data extraction is completed.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S2906, a face data storage process is executed in step S2907. Specifically, the visible image data of the extracted face is stored in a reference visible image storage area (not shown) provided in the sound light side RAM 95, and the distance data is stored in a reference distance data storage area (not shown) provided in the sound light side RAM 95. To store. The reference visible image storage area is an area for storing the visible image data of the player as a reference, and the reference distance data storage area is an area for storing the distance data of the player as a reference. It is. With reference to the visible image data stored in the reference visible image storage area and the distance data stored in the reference distance data storage area, an event in which the player is paying attention is specified.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2904, it is determined in step S2908 whether data is stored in a reference visible image storage area (not shown) and a reference distance data storage area (not shown) provided in the sound light side RAM 95. By providing this process, the subsequent process can be made different depending on whether or not the player's face data serving as a reference has been acquired by the end of the effect shown in FIG. 63 (c). If the determination in step S2908 is affirmative, the process for extracting the player's face data as a reference is not performed thereafter. When the most flashy production is generated in the above intense heat reach production, the player is very likely to stare at the production until the end. In other words, the player's face data, which is the standard acquired before the end of the most flashy rendition, is very likely to face the front of the symbol display device 61. . Here, if the processing of step S2908 is not provided, even if the player's face data serving as a reference can be acquired before the most flashy production in the intense heat reach production, The extraction process of the player's face data as a reference is repeatedly executed until the end of the reach production. Therefore, by providing the process, it is possible to reliably acquire the face data of the player facing the front with respect to the symbol display device 61.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2908, the processing from step S2905 to step S2907 is performed again. If a negative determination is made in step S2906, or if the process of step S2907 is executed, it is determined in step S2909 whether the pointer information corresponds to the data at the end of the intense heat reach effect. In step S2909, an affirmative determination is made when the content of the task is pointer information corresponding to the data at the end of the intense heat reach effect. By providing this processing, it becomes possible to make the sound light side MPU 93 know that the period for acquiring the player's face data as a reference has ended. In addition, since it is only necessary to acquire the player's face data as a reference in the generation period of the intense heat-based reach effect, for example, a period for acquiring the player's face data as a reference only immediately after the occurrence of the intense heat-based reach effect is generated. Compared to a configuration in which the player is not provided, the possibility of acquiring the reference player's face data is increased.

  If the determination in step S2909 is affirmative, it is determined in step S2910 whether or not data is stored in a reference visible image storage area (not shown) and a reference distance data storage area (not shown) provided in the sound light side RAM 95. By providing the process, whether or not the player's face data serving as a reference in the period of occurrence of the intense heat reach effect can be obtained in the situation where the initial normal type table is read out to the sound side RAM 95, Subsequent processing can be made different.

  If the determination in step S2910 is affirmative, the initial normal type table read to the sound light side RAM 95 in step S2911 is erased, and the balanced normal type table is read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95. Unlike the initial normal type table, the balanced normal type table is set so that the occurrence frequency of the intense heat reach effect is low. Thereby, it becomes possible to suppress the irritation to the frequent occurrence of the intense heat reach effect when the determination result is a failure result.

  In step S2912, “1” is set to the individual rotation number flag provided in the sound light side RAM 95. When “1” is set in the individual rotation number flag, the individual rotation number provided in the sound side RAM 95 in the game number update process executed in step S609 of the main-side command handling process (FIG. 15). The counter is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the number of digestion games measured in the individual rotation number counter. The individual rotation speed counter is used to count the specified rotation speed (30 rotations). An event that has been noticed by the player up to the specified number of revolutions is identified, and an execution mode of an effect corresponding to the attention type corresponding to the identification result is set. Here, the flow of a series of processing for setting the attention type during the game is the same as that of the first embodiment, but the content of the attention point type determination processing is different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the player's visible image data and distance data as a reference, and the player's visible image data and distance data acquired in a state where “1” is set in the individual rotation number flag. To identify the event that the player sees during the game. When the specified rotational speed is exhausted, the value of the individual rotational speed flag is cleared to “0”. By providing the process of step S2912, it becomes possible to specify the timing at which the sound light side MPU 93 changes from the balanced normal type table to the focused point type table corresponding to the event that the player has focused on during the game. .

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2910, the initial normal type table read to the sound light side RAM 95 in step S2913 is erased, and the balance type normal type table is read from the sound light side ROM 94 to the sound light side RAM 95. Further, when a negative determination is made in step S2910, “1” is not set in the individual rotation number flag, so that the state where the balanced normal type table is set in the sound light side RAM 95 is maintained. Here, if the process that identifies the event that the player is paying attention to during the game is executed when the reference player's face data cannot be acquired, the event that the player is paying attention to is accurately It may not be possible to specify. Therefore, if the reference player's face data cannot be acquired, the execution mode of the effect different from the player's attention type is set by not setting “1” in the individual rotation number flag. It becomes possible to stop.

<Time chart showing how to set the type table>
The manner in which the type table is set will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a time chart showing how the type table is set when the player's face data serving as a reference is acquired during the intense heat reach effect generation period and when it is not. 67 (a) shows a period in which the initial normal type table is set, FIG. 67 (b) shows a period of occurrence of the intense heat type reach effect, and FIG. 67 (c) shows a period of the intense heat type reach effect. FIG. 67 (d) shows a period during which the extraction process of the player's face data serving as a reference in the generation period of the flashy production is performed in the generation period of the flashy production, FIG. 67 (e) shows a period in which “1” is set in the individual rotation number flag when the player's face data serving as a reference in the generation period of the flashy production in the intense heat reach production is obtained. FIG. 67 (f) shows a period during which the balance-type normal type table is set when the player's face data serving as a reference can be acquired in the generation period of the flashy production in the intense heat reach production. , Fig. 67 (g) is a direct heat reach production. FIG. 67 (h) shows a period in which any focus point type table is set when the player's face data serving as a reference can be acquired in the generation period of the hand effect. FIG. FIG. 67 (i) shows a period in which the process of extracting the player's face data as a reference is performed when the player's face data as a reference cannot be acquired during the generation period of the flashy performance. In the case where the player's face data serving as a reference in the reach production occurrence period is not acquired, “1” is not set in the individual rotation number flag, and FIG. 67 (j) shows the intense heat reach production occurrence period. FIG. 67A shows the period when the balance type normal type table is set when the face data of the player who becomes the reference in FIG. ing.

  First, an initial normal type table is set at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. Specifically, when the player's face data is stored in the pre-data storage area 95c in a situation where the player's face data is not stored in the pre-data storage area 95c, or the player is different before and after leaving the seat. The initial normal type table is set. The initial normal type table is set so that the occurrence frequency of the intense heat reach effect is increased. As described above, the intense heat-based reach effect is a reach effect that can be expected to be a big hit, so the player is likely to stare at the reach effect. Therefore, it becomes possible to quickly acquire the reference player's face data.

  As shown in FIG. 67B, the intense heat reach effect occurs at the timing of t2. The intense heat system reach effect is the reach effect shown in FIG. At the timing when the intense heat reach effect is generated, a flashy effect for causing the player's consciousness to be directed to the symbol display device 61 is generated as shown in FIG. 67 (c). Specifically, the background of the symbol display device 61 is blacked out, and the face of the character whose eyes are closed is displayed fully on the symbol display device 61. Then, a few seconds after the face of the character with closed eyes is displayed, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), the character's eyes open, and the character of “hot” is displayed on the face of the character. Occur. The player's consciousness can be completely directed to the symbol display device 61 by the most flashy production. Also, at the same timing, as shown in FIG. 67 (d), the process of extracting the reference player's face data is executed.

  And the generation | occurrence | production period of a flashy production is complete | finished as shown in FIG.67 (c) at the timing of t3. When the player's face data serving as a reference can be acquired in the generation period of the flashy effect, the process of extracting the player's face data serving as a reference ends at the same timing as shown in FIG. 67 (d). . As described above, it is highly likely that the player's face data, which is the reference acquired during the generation period of the flashy effect, is facing the front with respect to the symbol display device 61. Therefore, when the reference player's face data can be acquired in the period of the flashy production, the symbol display device 61 is prevented from performing the extraction process of the reference player's face data thereafter. It is possible to reliably acquire the face data of the player facing the front.

  At the timing t4, the generation period of the intense heat reach effect ends as shown in FIG. 67 (b), and the initial normal type table is deleted at the same timing as shown in FIG. 67 (a). At the same timing, as shown in FIG. 67 (e), “1” is set in the individual rotation number flag provided in the sound side RAM 95, and at the same timing, as shown in FIG. 67 (f), the balanced normal type The table is read into the sound light side RAM 95. The state where the balance type normal type table is read out to the sound light side RAM 95 is maintained until the prescribed rotational speed is consumed. Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (g) at the timing of t5 when the prescribed rotational speed is consumed, the point-of-interest type table corresponding to the event that the player has noticed until the prescribed rotational speed is consumed is read out to the sound side RAM 95. It is. Thereby, the execution mode of the production according to the focus point type table is set.

  On the other hand, if the reference player's face data cannot be acquired in the period of the flashy production, as shown in FIG. 67 (h) from the timing t3 to the timing t4, the reference game is again performed. The person's face data is extracted. Therefore, even if the player's face data serving as a reference cannot be acquired in the generation period of the flashy effect, the process of extracting the player's face data serving as a reference is performed until the intense heat reach effect ends. The possibility of acquiring the player's face data as a reference is increased.

  If the reference player's face data cannot be acquired by the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 67 (i), “1” is not set in the individual rotation number flag provided in the sound side RAM 95. As described above, if the process for identifying the event that the player is paying attention to during the game is executed when the reference player's face data cannot be acquired, the event that the player is paying attention to May not be accurately identified. Therefore, if the reference player's face data cannot be acquired, the execution mode of the effect different from the player's attention type is set by not setting “1” in the individual rotation number flag. It becomes possible to stop. At the same timing, the balanced normal type table is read into the sound light side RAM 95 as shown in FIG. Thereby, the execution mode of the production corresponding to the balance type normal type table is maintained. Here, as described above, the balance type normal type table is set so that the occurrence frequency of the intense heat type reach effect is lowered, unlike the initial normal type table. Thereby, it becomes possible to suppress the irritation to the frequent occurrence of the intense heat reach effect when the determination result is a failure result.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, the process of extracting the face data of the player who becomes the reference during the game is performed. The player's face data serving as the reference is face data facing the front with respect to the symbol display device 61. Here, during the game, the player is highly likely to stare at the effects generated on the symbol display device 61. Therefore, it is possible to acquire the reference player's face data in a natural manner during the game without providing a period for acquiring the reference player's face data before the game.

  In addition, in the period in which the intense heat-based reach effect that can be expected for the jackpot is generated on the symbol display device 61, the process of extracting the face data of the player as a reference is performed. Here, when the intense reach type production that the player can expect to win is generated, the player is likely to stare at the intense type reach production. Also, when the intense heat reach effect is generated, the flashy effect shown in FIG. 63 (b) is generated in order to direct the player's consciousness toward the symbol display device 61, and after a few seconds, the flashy effect shown in FIG. 63 (c) is generated. Production. In the event that the most flashy effect occurs in the intense heat reach effect shown in FIG. 63 (c), the player is very likely to stare at the effect. In the present embodiment, a determination process is performed to determine whether or not the player's face data serving as a reference has been acquired at the timing when the most flashy effect in the intense heat reach effect is completed. If the reference player's face data can be acquired, the reference player's face data extraction process is not executed thereafter. Therefore, the face data of the player facing the front with respect to the symbol display device 61 can be reliably acquired. In addition, if the player's face data cannot be acquired at the timing when the most flashy production is completed, the player's reference will be displayed until the end of the intense production. Face data extraction processing is performed. Therefore, for example, compared with a configuration in which a period for acquiring the reference player's face data is not provided until the timing when the most flashy presentation is finished in the intense heat reach effect, the reference player's face data is provided. It is possible to increase the possibility of acquiring

  In addition, when the player's face data as a reference can be acquired by the end of the most flashy production in the intense heat reach, the sound side RAM 95 is stored until the intense reach production is completed. “1” is not set in the provided individual rotational speed flag. Here, if the player's face data serving as a reference can be acquired by the end of the most flashy rendition, the individual rotation speed flag provided in the sound side RAM 95 is immediately displayed. If “1” is set, a process for identifying an event that the player is paying attention to during the game during the occurrence of the intense heat reach effect is performed. The player is highly likely to stare at the intense heat reach production while the intense heat reach production occurs. Therefore, the liquid crystal concentration type may be set as the player's attention type. In this regard, according to the present configuration, when the player's face data serving as a reference can be acquired, “1” is set in the individual rotation number flag provided in the sound side RAM 95 at the timing when the intense heat reach effect is completed. Is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the liquid crystal concentration type from being forcibly set.

  In addition, an initial normal type table in which intense heat-based reach effects frequently occur at the start of the game is set in the sound light side RAM 95. Therefore, it becomes possible to quickly obtain the player's face data as a reference at the start of the game. In addition, when the reference player's face data cannot be acquired in the period of occurrence of the intense heat reach effect, a balanced normal type table with a low occurrence frequency of the intense heat reach effect is read to the sound side RAM 95. . Here, in the reach effect lottery table corresponding to the result of losing the success / failure result in the initial normal type table, the numerical range of the reach effect counter RD corresponding to the intense heat reach effect is set to be increased. Therefore, after the acquisition period of the reference player's face data ends, the balance-type normal type table is read out to the sound-light side RAM 95, so that the situation where the intense heat system reach effect as a result of detachment frequently occurs. It becomes possible to stop. Thereby, it becomes possible to suppress irritation of a player.

  Further, even if the initial normal type table is read out to the sound side RAM 95, the intense heat reach effect does not occur 100%. Here, if it is configured to generate 100% of the intense heat reach effect, the intense reach effect is always generated in the first reach effect after the game is started. This may cause distrust to the player. In this regard, according to this configuration, even if the initial normal type table is read out to the sound side RAM 95, a reach effect other than the intense heat reach effect is also generated, so that the player is distrusted. Absent.

  If the reference face data cannot be acquired, the balance-type normal type table is read into the sound light side RAM 95 until the player finishes the game. That is, when the face data serving as the reference cannot be acquired, the process of specifying the event that the player is paying attention to during the game is not executed. Here, in the case where the face data of the player as a reference could not be acquired, if the process for identifying the event that the player is paying attention to during the game is executed, the event that the player is paying attention to is accurately It may not be possible to specify. Therefore, if the face data of the player who becomes the reference cannot be acquired, the execution mode of the production different from the player's attention type is not performed by not performing the process of identifying the event that the player is paying attention during the game. Can be prevented from being set.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually or in combination to the configurations of the above embodiments.

  (1) In 1st Embodiment, it is good also as a structure which provides a jackpot as a kind of losing, and provides a latent jackpot as a kind of jackpot, and raises the probability that a jackpot will occur in the case of a suspicion type. If you win the hidden jackpot, you will shift to the high probability mode internally. However, even if you win the hidden jackpot, you will not enter the high frequency support mode. Also, even if the small hit is won, the internal mode does not change. In other words, even if it is a low-probability mode internally and wins a small hit, it remains in the low-probability mode. Also, even if you win a small win, it does not shift to the high frequency support mode. Further, when the upper symbol row Z1 stops at “3”, the middle symbol row Z2 stops at “4”, and the lower symbol row Z3 stops at “1”, the latent hit or The player is informed that the small hit is won. Here, when winning the latent big hit or the small win, the same mode screen is displayed. Therefore, the player cannot instantly distinguish whether the mode has been changed to the high probability mode or the low probability mode when the mode screen is changed. By not notifying the player whether or not the mode has been shifted to the high probability mode internally, it is possible to increase the throbbing feeling of the player. Also, by increasing the probability of winning small hits and not changing the probability of winning the hidden jackpot, the probability of winning in the high probability mode will not be different for each type, and the player will be more entertained. Is possible.

  (2) In the first embodiment, when the attention type before and after sitting does not match, the normal type is set at the start of the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, attention before and after sitting. Even when the types do not match, a configuration in which an attention type other than the normal type is set may be used. Specifically, for example, when the seating is an amateur type and the seating is a professional type, the professional type is set at the start of the game. In this case, however, an amateur type may be set. In addition, when the attention types before and after sitting do not match, the attention type according to the attention types before and after sitting may be set. Specifically, for example, in the case where the person before sitting is an amateur type and the person after sitting is a professional type, an attention type reflecting characteristics of both the amateur type and the professional type may be set. As a result, it is possible to set the attention type with higher accuracy than when the normal type is set.

  (3) In the first embodiment, when the attention type at the start of the game is an amateur type, in the game times started in a situation where the number of holds is “0”, a reach effect always occurs and display is continued. It is good also as a structure from which the production | presentation with the highest expectation degree of jackpot is selected in relation to time. Further, in this case, since a display with a long display duration is selected, it is possible to easily generate a reach effect in the game times started in a situation where the number of holds is “0”.

  (4) In 1st Embodiment, the structure for making a player's face face the front with respect to the symbol display apparatus 61 may be provided. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be provided in which the viewpoint position specifying mark 128 on which the character of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed is displayed in the center of the symbol display device 61.

  (5) In 1st and 2nd embodiment, it is good also as a structure which resets an attention type again according to the rotation speed during game. Specifically, the attention type is set every 50 rotations such as 1 to 50 rotations and 51 to 100 rotations. For example, when the player's line of sight from 1 to 50 rotations is grasped and the player frequently checks the nail 59 provided on the game board 51, the nail concentration type is set. Thereafter, the direction of the player's line of sight from 51 to 100 rotations is grasped, and when the player is staring at the symbol display device 61, the liquid crystal concentration type is set. The reason for such a configuration is that the player does not always take the same action during the game. As illustrated, there is a possibility that the user gets tired of checking the nail 59 provided on the game board 51 and enjoys the effect by staring at the symbol display device 61. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the attention type in the game is set again, it is possible to set the attention type closest to the player at the present time, and it is possible to perform an effect more suitable for the player.

  (6) In the first and second embodiments, when the player's eyes cannot be recognized, such as the player wearing sunglasses, in the first embodiment, the normal type table is read out at the start of the game and specified. The liquid crystal concentration table may be read after the number of rotations. In the second embodiment, the liquid crystal concentration table may be read after a specified number of rotations. As a result, the attention type can be set even when the player's eyes cannot be recognized.

  (7) In the first and second embodiments, regardless of the type of the attention type, the execution mode of effects from the start of the game to the specified number of rotations is different from the execution mode of effects after the specified number of rotations. It is good also as a structure. Specifically, a tutorial effect that explains the game content of the pachinko machine 10 is likely to occur from the start of the game to the specified rotational speed, and the tutorial effect is less likely to occur after the specified rotational speed. That is, for a player who does not know the game content of the pachinko machine 10, from the start of the game until the specified number of rotations, the frequency of production of notification of the basic game content of the pachinko machine 10 is increased, and the game content of the pachinko machine 10 After the specified number of revolutions, which is expected to be well-known, the frequency of the production of informing the basic game content of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered. Further, in this configuration, it is determined whether or not the players before and after leaving the seat are the same, and when the players before and after leaving the seat are not the same, the effect of notifying the basic game content of the pachinko machine 10 again. Is generated, and after the specified number of rotations, the generation frequency of the effect of informing the basic game content of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced. Thereby, even when a player changes, it becomes possible to notify the basic game content of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to always generate an effect corresponding to the game level of the player.

  (8) In 1st and 2nd embodiment, it is not limited to the structure from which the selection frequency of an effect differs according to a player's attention type, For example, a dedicated effect is set for every attention type. It is good also as composition which has. In this case, it is assumed that the same effect does not exist in the dedicated effect set for each attention type. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to set only an effect that meets the needs of the attention type.

  (9) In the first and second embodiments, the occurrence frequency of various effects may be different for each type of attention when the result is a jackpot result. Specifically, in the case of the normal type, the frequency of occurrence of various effects is the same as in the first embodiment. In the case of the throwing type, it is set so that the occurrence frequency of the healing system in the message notice and the generation frequency of the apology-type reach effect are higher than in the normal type. Here, as described above, it is conceivable that the throwing-type player feels frustrated, and it is possible to give the player the energy to continue the game by healing the player's feelings. .

  In the case of the amateur type, the frequency of the tutorial system in the message notice and the generation frequency of the intense heat reach effect are set to be higher than those in the normal type. Here, as described above, the amateur type player does nothing about the game content of the pachinko machine 10. Also, you can be excited about the production that you can expect from the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to continue the game for a long time without getting bored by increasing the occurrence frequency of the tutorial system and the generation frequency of the intense heat system in the message notice.

  Further, in the case of the professional type, the normal system occurrence frequency and the intense heat system reach production frequency in the message notice are set higher than the normal type. Here, as described above, since the professional player is only interested in the result, the content of the production is less interested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the professional type player from being stressed by increasing the frequency of occurrence of the intense heat reach effect that can be expected for the jackpot result.

  Further, in the case of the suspicion type, it is set so that the occurrence frequency of the Zen question and answer system and the occurrence frequency of the scoring system in the message notice are higher than the normal type. Here, as described above, the suspicion-type player wants to feel as long as possible the expectation that the success / failure result is a jackpot result. Therefore, by increasing the frequency of occurrence of Zen questions and answers and the frequency of occurrence of reach-based reach in the message notice, it becomes possible to attract suspicious players to the game.

  (10) In the first and second embodiments, when the imaging device 73 is not used for setting the attention type, the imaging device 73 may be used for monitoring. Specifically, “1” is set in the monitoring flag provided in the main RAM 85 or the sound light RAM 95 when there is no player or when the power is cut off. When “1” is set in the monitoring flag, monitoring imaging processing is executed. The monitoring imaging process is a process performed in order to monitor fraud with respect to the pachinko machine 10 when power is interrupted. In the monitoring imaging process, first, the acquired visible image is stored in a monitoring image storage area provided in the main side RAM 85 or the sound light side RAM 95. Further, the main ROM 84 or the sound light ROM 94 is provided with an unauthorized image area in which unauthorized image data is stored in advance. By referring to the image data stored in the monitoring image storage area and the unauthorized image data stored in the unauthorized image area, it is determined whether or not the image data captured this time is an unauthorized image. The illegal image is, for example, an image in which a player's hand extends to the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, or a thin iron wire on the upper plate 33 provided on the inner side of the upper bulge 31. It is an image that is trying to insert the illegal equipment. If the image data captured this time is an illegal image, “1” is added to the value of the illegal image continuous counter provided in the main RAM 85 or the sound light RAM 95. The unauthorized image continuous counter is a counter for causing the main MPU 83 or the sound light side MPU 93 to grasp that unauthorized images have been continuously acquired. Thereafter, when the value of the illegal image continuous counter reaches a specific value (for example, 50), “1” is set to the illegal image counter provided in the main RAM 85 or the sound light side RAM 95. When the value of the unauthorized image counter reaches a certain value (for example, 10), “1” is set to an unauthorized notification flag provided in the main RAM 85 or the sound light RAM 95. The fraud notification flag is a flag for specifying that fraud has occurred in the main MPU 83 or the sound light MPU 93. By setting “1” in the fraud notification flag, the light emission data and sound output data for fraud notification are referred to in the light emission control process and the sound output control process, and the display light emitting unit 23 emits light corresponding to the fraud notification. And a sound corresponding to the fraud notification is output from the speaker unit 24. In this case, a display command for fraud notification is transmitted to the display control device 96. The display control device 96 receives the display command so that the symbol display device 61 performs a display effect for fraud notification. Thereby, it becomes possible to notify the persons concerned in a game hall that fraud was performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  (11) In the first and second embodiments, a line-of-sight history may be collected for each type of attention, and the line-of-sight history may be managed by the hall computer HC. The game maker can identify what is a low attention level event and a high level event by looking at the history stored in the hall computer HC. Further, by looking at the history stored in the hall computer HC, it is determined whether or not the movable object unit 38 is firmly stared when an effect using the movable object unit 38 with a high expectation degree of jackpot is generated. Or when the small movable combination 39a, the middle movable combination 39b, and the large movable combination 39c move at the same time, it is possible to specify whether the three movable combinations 39a, 39b, and 39c are stared firmly. It becomes possible. Thereby, the attention level of the movable object unit 38 and the movable combination items 39a, 39b, and 39c can be known, and can be utilized for future development of the pachinko machine 10.

  (12) In the first and second embodiments, a function (my patch function) that can customize the performance of the pachinko machine 10 using a two-dimensional code and a password is installed, and the attention type and the game before the game starts The attention type may be stored, and the next attention type may be set when the player sets a mypachi function and plays a game next time.

  In addition, the level of the Mypachi function increases in accordance with the cumulative number of game rotations and the type of effect that has occurred. It may be configured such that the player himself can change the setting of the liquid crystal effect and the variation time by raising the level of the Mypachi function. Moreover, it is good also as a structure automatically set in the pachinko machine 10 instead of a player itself.

  The Mypachi function is a service in which a mobile communication terminal such as a mobile phone, the pachinko machine 10, and a website are linked, and grasps the number of attention types before the start of the game and the number of each attention type during the game. Is possible. Therefore, the sales maker can specify whether it is a pachinko machine 10 that receives amateurs, a pachinko machine 10 that receives skilled workers, or a pachinko machine 10 that receives everyone. Further, when the results accumulated in the Mypachi function are accumulated and there are few players staring at the movable object unit 38 and the movable accessory items 39a, 39b, 39c, the movable object unit 38 and the movable accessory items 39a, 39b, 39c are used. It is possible that the degree of attention to is low. Therefore, it becomes possible to make use of this in the future development of the pachinko machine 10 in which the configuration of the movable object unit 38 and the movable combination items 39a, 39b, 39c is changed or the arrangement is changed.

  (13) In the first and second embodiments, the method for specifying whether or not the players before and after leaving the seat are the same person is specified by whether or not the faces of the players before and after leaving the seat are the same. The method is not limited to this, and for example, it may be specified whether or not the player before and after leaving the seat is the same person by setting fingerprint authentication or the Mypachi function. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a fingerprint authentication device, and when a player is seated in a chair installed in front of the pachinko machine 10, an image informing that the finger is put on the fingerprint authentication device is displayed as a symbol. It is displayed on the device 61. Then, the fingerprint placed on the fingerprint authentication device is stored. In addition, the fingerprint of the player who is seated again after leaving the seat is also stored. By checking fingerprints before and after leaving the seat, it is specified whether or not the players before and after leaving the seat are the same.

  (14) In the first and second embodiments, the player pays attention using both the visible image data stored in the visible image storage area 95a and the distance data stored in the distance data storage area 95b. However, the present invention is not limited to the configuration that identifies the event that is being performed. For example, the event that the player is interested in may be identified using only the distance data stored in the distance data storage area 95b. Further, when determining whether or not the players before and after leaving the seat are the same, the determination may be made using only the visible image data stored in the visible image storage area 95a.

  (15) In the second embodiment, the method of making the player's face face the front with respect to the symbol display device 61 is limited to displaying the viewpoint position specifying mark 128 at the center of the symbol display device 61. Instead, the viewpoint position specifying marks 128 may be displayed at the four corners of the symbol display device 61. Further, immediately after the player sits on the chair, the symbol display device 61 displays a screen notifying that the player's viewpoint position is to be set from now on, so that the player's consciousness is directed to the symbol display device 61. It is good. Further, a sound may be played when the viewpoint position specifying mark 128 or a screen for notifying that the player's viewpoint position is to be set is displayed. As a result, the player's face can be reliably directed to the symbol display device 61.

  (16) In the second embodiment, when the viewpoint position specifying mark 128 is displayed and the player has not looked at the viewpoint position specifying mark 128 continuously for a certain period of time, the extracted player's visible The image data and the distance data are not stored in the reference visible image storage area 85d and the reference distance data storage area 85e. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the accuracy of the face data of the player facing the front with respect to the pachinko machine 10.

  (17) In the third embodiment, even when the pachinko machine 10 that is ahead of the player's line of sight is not adjacent to the pachinko machine 10 that is playing (for example, the pachinko machine that is ahead of the player's line of sight) 10 is adjacent to the pachinko machine 10 where the game is playing), the reach effect of the gaming machine in the line of sight of the player may be generated in the pachinko machine 10 playing the game. This makes it possible to reliably generate a reach effect that the player is interested in in the pachinko machine 10 that is being played, and to prevent the game from getting bored.

  (18) In the third embodiment, the contents of the reach effect seen by the player may be stored, and the reach effect may be preferentially generated from the reach effect that the player has seen frequently. Specifically, a counter corresponding to the contents of the reach effect is provided, and when an effect providing command is received, the counter value corresponding to that is added by “1”. By referring to the value of the counter, it is possible to specify the reach effect that the player has seen frequently. In this case, the reach effect that the player has seen most frequently is generated, but in the current game round, the reach effect that the player has seen the most frequently in view of the display duration cannot be generated. In this case, a reach effect having the second highest frequency that the player has seen is generated. That is, priority is given to the counter set in descending order, and a reach effect that can be generated in the current game round is specified. Since the priority is set for the reach production seen by the player, it is possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of the reach production that the player is interested in. Further, since a plurality of reach effects viewed by the player are stored according to priority, the occurrence frequency of reach effects that the player is interested in is increased as compared with a configuration in which one reach effect viewed by the player is stored. Is possible.

  (19) In the third embodiment, when the reach effect time generated in the current game round is longer than the reach effect stored in the effect providing command, the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped. It is good also as a structure which adjusts the time of reach production by lengthening time until doing or generating a pseudo | simulation ream. The pseudo-ream is an effect in which the start of symbol variation display is generated a plurality of times during one game. In addition, it is assumed that a big hit can be expected by the occurrence of pseudo-ream. By generating an effect that adjusts the time of the reach effect before the symbol is finally stopped, it is possible to increase the expectation of the jackpot and attract the player's interest.

  (20) In the third embodiment, the player sees the image during the round game displayed on the left or right pachinko machine 10, and the player was watching the pachinko machine 10 during the game. It is good also as a structure which displays the image in the same round. Since the image during the round game is a premium image with a low appearance rate, it is conceivable that the player stares at the premium image when it occurs in another pachinko machine 10 that is not the pachinko machine 10 being played. In this configuration, when a player is watching another pachinko machine 10, an effect request command is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 being viewed by the player. The pachinko machine 10 that has received the effect request command transmits an effect providing command storing premium image information to the pachinko machine 10 that the player is playing. The pachinko machine 10 that has received the effect providing command displays the premium image during the open / close execution mode in which the round game is executed as many times as the premium image can be displayed.

  (21) In the fourth embodiment, the initial normal type table may be set until the reference player's face data is acquired. According to this configuration, it is possible to reliably acquire the player's face data. Therefore, it is possible to reliably set the attention type suitable for the player.

  (22) In the fourth embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the acquisition of the player's face data as a reference during the period in which the intense heat reach effect is occurring. The player's face data serving as a reference may be acquired during the display period. Specifically, a flashy effect is generated to cause the player's consciousness to be directed to the symbol display device 61 when the notice of the intense heat system is generated, and the flashy effect is generated after a few seconds. In the event that the most flashy effect occurs in the intense heat-based notice display, the player is very likely to stare at the effect. Further, it is assumed that a determination process as to whether or not the player's face data serving as a reference has been acquired is performed at the timing when the most flashy presentation in the intense heat-based notice display is completed. If the reference player's face data can be acquired, the reference face data extraction process is not executed thereafter. Therefore, the face data of the player facing the front with respect to the symbol display device 61 can be reliably acquired. In addition, if the player's face data cannot be acquired by the timing when the most flashy presentation in the intense heat announcement is completed, the player who becomes the reference until the end of the intense heat announcement is displayed. The face data is extracted. Therefore, for example, compared to a configuration in which a period for acquiring the reference player's face data is not provided until the timing at which the most flashy presentation in the intense heat notice display ends, the reference player's face data It is possible to increase the possibility of acquiring The notice display of the intense heat system occurs when the display duration time during which the reach effect is generated is selected. In addition, when the player's face data serving as a reference cannot be acquired during the period of occurrence of the notice of the intense heat system, extraction of the player's face data serving as the reference in the reach effect generated after the notice of the intense heat system is displayed. Processing may be performed. In this case, it is assumed that the player's face data extraction process is executed until the reach effect ends. As a result, the opportunity to perform the process of extracting the player's face data as a reference increases, so that the face data of the player as a reference can be reliably acquired.

  (23) In the fourth embodiment, when the initial normal type table is read out to the sound light side RAM 95, it may be configured that 100% of the intense heat reach effect occurs. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform the process of extracting the player's face data as a reference more quickly than the configuration in which the intense heat-based reach effect does not occur 100%. Therefore, since the execution mode of the production corresponding to the event that the player was watching during the game is quickly set, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately stopping the game.

  (24) In the fourth embodiment, when an intense heat type reach effect is generated in a situation where the initial normal type table is read to the sound side RAM 95, the intense heat type reach effect is generated. The sound output from the speaker unit 24 may be configured to be louder than normal. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the light emission of the display light emission part 23 becomes brighter than usual at the time of the above-mentioned intense heat system reach production. Thereby, compared with the case where the sound output from the speaker part 24 and the light emission of the display light emission part 23 are normal, it becomes easy to make a player's face turn to an intense-heat reach effect. Therefore, it is possible to reliably acquire the player's face data as a reference.

  (25) In the fourth embodiment, when the player's face data serving as a reference cannot be acquired, the balance-type normal type table is limited to a configuration in which the state in which the balance-type normal type table is read into the sound light side RAM 95 is maintained. However, for example, a type table other than the balanced normal type table may be read out to the sound light side RAM 95. Specifically, a point-of-interest type table corresponding to an event noticed by the player during the game is read out to the sound light side RAM 95 after a specified number of rotations. Thereby, even if the player's face data serving as a reference cannot be acquired, an effect execution mode suitable for the player is obtained. Therefore, it is possible to concentrate the player on the game.

  (26) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right if a player enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from the Embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses and the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses and the like.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. Information deriving means (signal processing circuit 78) capable of deriving state information of the monitoring range existing ahead of the gaming machine based on the reception result in the receiving unit (imaging device 73);
Visual range identifying means for identifying the visual range that the player is viewing using the state information derived by the information deriving means (steps S1002, S1402, and S1801 in the sound light side MPU 93 in the first embodiment). In the second embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2301 in the main MPU 83, a function of executing the process of step S2503 in the sound light MPU 93 in the third embodiment),
The effect setting means (the pre-seating type setting process in the sound light side MPU 93 in the first embodiment, the effect that the result of specifying the visual recognition range by the visual recognition range specifying means affects the content of the effect executed thereafter) Function for executing post-seating type setting processing, attention point type setting processing, and processing of steps S606 to S608, function for executing attention point type setting processing in the main MPU 83 in the second embodiment, and in the third embodiment The function of executing the processing of S2709 to S2712 in the sound light side MPU 93),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A1, the event that the player is paying attention to is grasped based on the specification of the line-of-sight range, and the grasped content affects the content of the effect that is subsequently executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect in line with the player's preference and to increase the degree of attention to the game. In addition, since the line-of-sight range is specified in a non-contact manner through the reception result in the receiving unit, it is possible to automatically provide an effect in accordance with the player's taste without depending on the player's operation.

Feature A2. Grant determination means for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player (a function of executing special figure variation start processing in the main MPU 83);
When the start condition is satisfied, the game turn operation is started, and when the display continuation period has elapsed, the game turn operation is ended, and the game turn operation is performed in a manner corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means. Game time control means (function to execute special figure special electric control processing in the main MPU 83) for controlling the game execution means to be performed;
With
The effect setting means influences the content of the effect when the game turning operation is performed while the result of the eye gaze range specifying by the eye gaze range specifying means does not affect the display continuation period. A gaming machine according to Feature A1, characterized by:

  According to the feature A2, it is possible to automatically provide an effect in accordance with the player's taste without affecting the digestion rate of the game times.

  Feature A3. The effect setting means is configured to execute a process for determining the content of an effect executed thereafter in a mode corresponding to the viewing range specified by the viewing range specifying means. A gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2.

  According to the feature A3, by causing the process for determining the content of the effect to be executed to correspond to the event that the player is paying attention to, the effect according to the player's taste is executed. Is possible. As a result, for example, it is possible to realize an effect in accordance with the player's taste while suppressing complication of processing as compared with the case where communication is performed with the outside of the gaming machine.

  Feature A4. The game according to Feature A3, wherein when the line-of-sight range is not specified by the line-of-sight range specifying unit, the effect setting unit determines an execution mode of the effect in a mode corresponding to the fact that the line-of-sight range is not specified. Machine.

  According to the feature A4, when the line-of-sight range is not properly specified, the effect is not performed in the form corresponding to the predetermined line-of-sight range. Since the contents are determined, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the execution mode of the performance will be uncomfortable for the player when the line-of-sight range cannot be properly specified.

Feature A5. The production setting means includes:
Based on the line-of-sight range specified by the line-of-sight range specifying means, type setting means for setting an attention type to be applied from a plurality of types of attention types (in the first embodiment, the type before seating in the sound light side MPU 93 is set) Processing, a function of executing the type setting process after sitting and the point of interest type setting process, a function of executing the point of interest type setting process in the main MPU 83 in the second embodiment),
Aspect determining means (function for executing the process of step S606 in the sound light side MPU 93) that determines the execution aspect of the effect in an aspect corresponding to the attention type set by the type setting means;
A gaming machine according to Feature A3 or A4, characterized in that

  According to the feature A5, it is possible to determine the content of the effect in a manner corresponding to the attention type of the classification result after classifying the event that the player is paying attention to any attention type. As a result, it is possible to provide an effect corresponding to the line-of-sight range while limiting the number of types of attention type set in the gaming machine design stage.

Feature A6. The type setting means sets the specific type when the line-of-sight range specified by the line-of-sight range specifying means corresponds to the line-of-sight range corresponding to a player with a low level of understanding of the game content of the gaming machine,
The aspect determining means is characterized in that, when the attention type set by the type setting means is the specific type, the execution frequency of the effect corresponding to the player having a low understanding level is increased. A gaming machine according to A5.

  According to the feature A6, the execution mode of the effect is adjusted so that the execution frequency of the effect corresponding to the player is high for a player with a low understanding level of the game content. As a result, even a player with a low level of understanding of the game content can increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A7. The type setting means is configured to set none of the plurality of attention types when the line-of-sight range is not specified by the line-of-sight range specifying means.
The aspect determining means has an effect execution frequency when none of the plurality of types of attention types is set by the type setting means than when any of the plurality of types of attention types is set. The gaming machine according to Feature A5 or A6, wherein an execution mode of the performance is determined in a manner that does not bias to a specific type of performance.

  According to the feature 7, when the line-of-sight range cannot be appropriately specified, the execution frequency of the production is not biased to a specific type of production. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the execution mode of the rendering becomes uncomfortable for the player when the line-of-sight range cannot be specified appropriately.

  Feature A8. When the erasing condition is satisfied, there is provided a canceling means (a function for executing the processing of Step S1903, Step S1906, Step S1908, Step S2006, and Step S2009 in the sound light side MPU 93) that cancels the attention type that has been set so far. The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A7, wherein:

  According to the feature A8, when the erasing condition is satisfied, the attention type set up to that point is canceled. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the attention type once set remains set for a long time.

Feature A9. Grant determination means for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player (a function of executing special figure variation start processing in the main MPU 83);
When the start condition is satisfied, the game turn operation is started, and when the display continuation period has elapsed, the game turn operation is ended, and the game turn operation is performed in a manner corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means. Game time control means (function to execute special figure special electric control processing in the main MPU 83) for controlling the game execution means to be performed;
With
The game machine according to Feature A8, wherein the release means releases the set attention type when the game turn operation is executed a predetermined number of times after the attention type is set.

  According to the feature A9, it is possible to prevent the same attention type from being continuously maintained when the same player continues the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the performance execution mode from becoming uniform.

  Feature A10. The type setting means, when the attention type is canceled by the cancellation means, based on the result of specifying the line-of-sight range by the line-of-sight range specifying means in a situation where the attention type targeted for cancellation is set. The gaming machine according to the feature A8 or A9, further comprising means for newly setting an attention type (a function of executing the processing of steps S1903, S1906, and S1908 in the sound light side MPU 93).

  According to the feature A10, it is possible to prevent the attention type based on the line-of-sight range specifying result by the line-of-sight range specifying unit from being set in a situation where the attention type to be canceled is not set. In addition, since the attention type is newly set, it is possible to set the attention type most suitable for the player at the present time.

  Feature A11. The canceling means cancels the set attention type when the player is replaced with another player after the attention type is set. Any one of features A8 to A10 Game machines.

  The attention type already set and the attention type of other players are not necessarily the same. According to the feature A11, since the attention type set by the player changing is canceled, the attention type suitable for the player can be set again.

Feature A12. Identification information for identifying a player is acquired based on a reception result in the receiving unit or a receiving unit different from the receiving unit, and the acquired identification information is stored as identification information storage means (visible image storage area 95a, distance data storage). Information acquisition means to be stored in area 95b) (function to store visible image data and distance data transmitted in step S803 in sound light side MPU 93)
With
When the player seated in the chair installed in front of the gaming machine leaves the release means, the release means does not cancel the attention type set at that time, and the player seated thereafter The gaming machine according to any one of features A8 to A11, wherein when the identification information does not match the identification information of the player seated immediately before, the attention type set at that time is canceled .

  According to the feature A12, since the attention type set at the time of leaving the seat is not released, it is not necessary to set the attention type again when the identification information of the player before and after leaving the seat matches. Also, if the player identification information before and after leaving the seat does not match, the attention type that has already been set is canceled, so that the attention type that matches the player can be set again.

  Feature A13. The gaming machine according to Feature A12, wherein the information acquisition means executes processing for acquiring the identification information in a situation where a player is seated.

  According to the feature A13, since the process for acquiring the identification information is executed in a situation where the player is seated, it is possible to acquire only the identification information of the player who has the intention to play the game.

Feature A14. Information group storage means (sound light side) for storing in advance a determination information group (type table) that is referred to when an effect to be executed is determined from a plurality of types of effects, corresponding to the plurality of types of attention types ROM94)
The type setting means reads the determination type information group of the attention type corresponding to the line-of-sight range specified by the line-of-sight range specifying means from the information group storage means to the reference storage means (sound light side RAM 95),
The aspect determination means determines an effect to be executed by referring to the determination information group read to the reference storage means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A13, wherein the state in which the determination information group is read to the reference storage unit is maintained while the attention type is maintained. .

  According to the feature A14, since the state in which the determination information group is read in the reference storage unit is held while the attention type is maintained, the process of reading the determination information group in the reference storage unit is 1 Only once. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

  Feature A15. The effect setting means is configured to execute a process for determining the content of an effect to be executed thereafter in a mode corresponding to a plurality of identification results of the line-of-sight range by the line-of-sight range specifying means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A3 to A14.

  According to the feature A15, since the content of the effect that is subsequently executed in a manner corresponding to a plurality of specific results is specified, it is possible to provide an effect that matches the event that the player pays attention to as much as possible. .

  Feature A16. The effect setting means is a result of specifying the line-of-sight range by the line-of-sight range specifying means in a situation where a player is present in front of the gaming machine before sitting on a chair installed in front of the gaming machine, In a manner corresponding to the combination of the line-of-sight range specifying result by the line-of-sight range specifying means after the player is seated on the chair, processing for determining the contents of the effect to be executed thereafter is executed. A gaming machine according to Feature A15, characterized in that:

  It is conceivable that the player pays attention to the object he / she is interested in before and after sitting at the gaming machine. On the other hand, according to the feature A16, the line-of-sight range is specified before and after sitting, and the process for determining the effect is performed in a manner corresponding to the combination of the specific results of the respective line-of-sight ranges. The As a result, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the correspondence between the performance execution mode and the player's preference.

Feature A17. The production setting means includes:
Type setting means for setting attention types corresponding to the identification results from a plurality of types of attention types when a plurality of identification results of the line-of-sight range by the line-of-sight range identification means correspond to each other. A function of executing start type setting processing in the sound light side MPU 93),
Aspect determining means (function for executing the process of step S606 in the sound light side MPU 93) that determines the execution aspect of the effect in an aspect corresponding to the attention type set by the type setting means;
A gaming machine according to Feature A15 or A16, comprising:

  According to feature A17, when a plurality of specific results of the line-of-sight range correspond to each other, a corresponding attention type is set, so that the player's preferences clearly appear with respect to the specific result of the line-of-sight range The process for determining the production in a manner corresponding to the taste is executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of a mismatch between the performance execution mode and the player's preference.

Feature A18. The type setting means is configured not to set any of the plurality of types of attention types when the plurality of identification results of the line-of-sight range by the line-of-sight range identification means are not specific results corresponding to each other,
The aspect determining means has an effect execution frequency when none of the plurality of types of attention types is set by the type setting means than when any of the plurality of types of attention types is set. The game machine according to Feature A17, wherein an execution mode of the effect is determined in a manner not biased to a specific type of effect.

  According to the feature A18, when the plurality of identification results of the line-of-sight range are not the identification results corresponding to each other, the execution frequency of the effects is not biased to the specific type of effects. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the execution mode of the performance becomes uncomfortable for the player in a situation where the player's attention type cannot be clearly specified.

Feature A19. Reference information storage means (reference visible image storage area 85d and reference distance data storage area provided in the main RAM 85 in the second embodiment) with the state information derived by the information derivation means in the reference information acquisition period as reference information 85e, the reference setting means (in the second embodiment, the main MPU 83 in the second embodiment) performs the process of step S2210 to be stored in the reference visible image storage area and the reference distance data storage area provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in the fourth embodiment. A function to be executed, and in the fourth embodiment, a function to execute the process of step S2907 in the sound light side MPU 93).
The line-of-sight range specifying means specifies the line-of-sight range using reference information stored in the reference information storage means and state information derived by the information deriving means. A gaming machine according to any one of A18.

  According to the feature A19, since the player's line-of-sight range is specified by taking into account not only the state information but also the reference information, the player's line-of-sight is strictly compared with the configuration in which the player's line-of-sight range is specified only by the state information. The range can be specified.

  Feature A20. The reference setting unit is a unit that displays a specific image (viewpoint position specifying mark 128) on a predetermined display unit (symbol display device 61) during the acquisition period of the reference information (function of executing step S2206 in the main MPU 83). ). The gaming machine according to Feature A19, wherein

  According to the feature A20, the specific image is displayed on the predetermined display unit during the reference information acquisition period. This makes it possible to reliably acquire the player's reference information during the reference information acquisition period.

Feature A21. The production setting means includes:
Specific transmission means for transmitting specific information to other gaming machines corresponding to the line-of-sight range specified by the line-of-sight range specifying means (function for executing the process of step S2517 in the sound light side MPU 93);
Effect execution means for executing the effect corresponding to the response information received from the other gaming machine that is the transmission target of the specific information (function to execute the processing of steps S2706 to S2709 in the sound light side MPU 93) When,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A20, comprising:

  According to the feature A21, an effect of another gaming machine that the player is watching is executed in the gaming machine that is being played. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency at which effects that the player is interested in are executed.

Feature A22. Provided with unit effect control means (function to execute main-side command corresponding processing in the sound light side MPU 93) so that a unit effect is executed when a specific execution opportunity occurs,
The production execution means
Execution specifying means for specifying whether or not the production corresponding to the response information can be executed in the unit production (function for executing the process of step S2708 in the sound light side MPU 93);
Means (sound light) for executing an effect corresponding to the response information in the unit effect when the execution specifying means specifies that the effect corresponding to the response information can be executed in the unit effect The function of executing the process of step S2709 in the side MPU 93),
The gaming machine according to Feature A21, comprising:

  According to the feature A22, when the effect corresponding to the response information cannot be executed in the unit effect, the effect corresponding to the response information is not forcibly executed. It is possible to reproduce an effect executed on another gaming machine while not adversely affecting the effect corresponding to the response information.

  According to each feature of the feature A group, the following problems can be solved.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, for a pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is performed based on a game ball entering a ball-entry unit provided in a game area, and a variation display of a pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device. In the case where a winning result is obtained, a combination of a specific pattern or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and a configuration for shifting to a special gaming state advantageous to the player is known. When the game state is shifted to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entering device provided in the game area is started, and a game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device. ing.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to suitably produce an effect in order to increase the degree of attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Production execution means for executing unit production (function of executing main-side command response processing in the sound side MPU 93);
Change specifying means for specifying that the player has been changed (a function for executing face authentication processing in the sound light side MPU 93);
Based on the fact that the player has been changed by the change specifying means, a mode changing means (function for executing the process of step S2006 in the sound side MPU 93) for changing the execution mode of the unit effect;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, when the player is changed, the execution mode of the presentation is changed accordingly. For example, for the player who newly started the execution of the presentation according to the player's taste It is possible to provide the production.

Feature B2. Production execution means for executing unit production (function of executing main-side command response processing in the sound side MPU 93);
Change specifying means for specifying that the player has been changed (a function for executing face authentication processing in the sound light side MPU 93);
A mode change that changes the execution mode of the unit effect based on the fact that the number of executions of the unit effect in the effect execution unit has become the reference number after it is specified that the player has been changed by the change specifying unit. Means (function to execute the processing of step S1903, step S1906 and step S1908 in the sound light side MPU 93);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B2, the game is continued to some extent by changing the execution mode of the unit effect based on the fact that the execution number of the unit effect has become the reference number since it is specified that the player has been changed. An effect can be provided to the player in a different manner. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of effects.

  Feature B3. The gaming machine according to Feature B2, wherein the mode changing unit changes the execution mode of the unit effect based on the fact that the player has been changed by the change specifying unit.

  According to the feature B3, when the player is changed, the execution mode of the production is changed accordingly, and when the number of executions of the unit production becomes the reference number after that, the execution mode of the production is changed accordingly. Be changed. As a result, it is possible to provide an effect in a mode corresponding to the start of the game for a player who has newly started the game, and to provide an effect in a mode corresponding to that when the game is continued to some extent Is possible. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect appropriately corresponding to the number of times the game is executed.

  Feature B4. The mode changing means is configured such that, when the change specifying means specifies that the player has been changed, the execution mode of the unit effect is the execution mode corresponding to the start, and the number of executions of the unit effect is In the situation where the execution mode of the unit effect is changed from the execution mode corresponding to the start when the reference number of times is reached, and the execution mode of the unit effect is the execution mode corresponding to the start, the change specifying means Even if it is determined that the player has been changed, the reference number of times is determined so that the execution mode of the unit effect is the execution mode corresponding to the start for the changed player. The gaming machine according to Feature B2 or B3, wherein

  According to the feature B4, for a player who has started a new game, the execution mode of the unit effect becomes the execution mode corresponding to the start, so that, for example, a player who is not used to the game can understand the game content. It is possible to produce an effect in an easy manner, and in addition, it is possible to preferentially appear an effect that makes it possible to attract the player who started the game to the game. Furthermore, even if the player changes in the middle of the execution mode corresponding to the start, for the new player, the execution mode of the effect is the execution of the start mode until the unit effect is performed a reference number of times. It becomes an aspect. As a result, it is possible to reliably produce the effect of providing the execution mode corresponding to the start until the unit effect is performed the reference number of times.

Feature B5. Provided with information deriving means (signal processing circuit 78) capable of deriving state information of the monitoring range existing ahead of the gaming machine based on the reception result in the receiving unit (imaging device 73);
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein the change specifying unit specifies that the player has been changed using the state information derived by the information deriving unit.

  According to the feature B5, it is specified that the player has been changed by using the state information derived based on the reception result by the receiving unit, so that the player has been changed without contact. It becomes possible.

Feature B6. Information acquisition means for acquiring identification information for identifying a player based on the reception result in the receiving unit, and storing the acquired identification information in the identification information storage means (visible image storage area 95a, distance data storage area 95b). A function of storing visible image data and distance data transmitted in the process of step S803 in the sound light side MPU 93),
If the player who is seated in the chair installed in front of the gaming machine leaves the mode change means, without changing the execution mode of the unit effect set at that time, Features B1 to B5 characterized in that when the identification information of the seated player does not match the identification information of the player seated immediately before, the execution mode of the unit effect set at that time is changed. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature B6, since the attention type set at the time of leaving the seat is not released, it is not necessary to set the execution mode of the unit effect again when the identification information of the player before and after leaving the seat matches. In addition, when the player identification information before and after leaving the seat does not match, the execution mode of the unit effect that has already been set is canceled, so the execution mode of the unit effect that matches the player can be set again. It becomes.

  Feature B7. The gaming machine according to Feature B6, wherein the information acquisition means executes a process for acquiring the identification information in a situation where a player is seated.

  According to the feature B7, since the process for acquiring the identification information is executed in the situation where the player is seated, it is possible to acquire only the identification information of the player who has the intention to play the game.

  According to each feature of the above-mentioned feature B group, the following problems can be solved.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, for a pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is performed based on a game ball entering a ball-entry unit provided in a game area, and a variation display of a pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device. In the case where a winning result is obtained, a combination of a specific pattern or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and a configuration for shifting to a special gaming state advantageous to the player is known. When the game state is shifted to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entering device provided in the game area is started, and a game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device. ing.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to suitably produce an effect in order to increase the degree of attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Information deriving means (signal processing circuit 78) capable of deriving state information of the monitoring range existing ahead of the gaming machine based on the reception result in the receiving unit (imaging device 73);
In the reference information acquisition period, which is a reference when specifying the player's line of sight range, the state information derived by the information deriving means is provided as reference information in the reference information storage means (provided in the main RAM 85 in the second embodiment). The reference setting means (the first reference visible image storage area and the reference distance data storage area provided in the sound light side RAM 95 in the fourth embodiment) are stored in the reference visible image storage area 85d and the reference distance data storage area 85e. In the second embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2210 in the main MPU 83, and in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2907 in the sound light side MPU 93),
A viewing range specifying means (second embodiment) for specifying a viewing range that the player is viewing using the reference information stored in the reference information storage means and the state information derived by the information deriving means. In the form, a function for executing the attention event specifying process in the main MPU 83, in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing the point of interest type determination process in the sound light side MPU 93),
Effect setting means (the point of interest type setting process in the main MPU 83 is executed in the second embodiment) such that the result of specifying the view range by the view range specifying means affects the contents of the effect executed thereafter. A function for executing the point-of-interest type setting process in the sound light side MPU 93 in the fourth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature C1, the event that the player is paying attention to is grasped based on the specification of the line-of-sight range, and the grasped content affects the content of the effect that is subsequently executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect in line with the player's preference and to increase the degree of attention to the game. In addition, since the line-of-sight range is specified in a non-contact manner through the reception result in the receiving unit, it is possible to automatically provide an effect in accordance with the player's taste without depending on the player's operation.

  In addition, since the player's line-of-sight range is specified by taking into account not only the state information but also the reference information, the player's line-of-sight range is specified more strictly than the configuration in which the player's line-of-sight range is specified only by the state information. It becomes possible.

  Feature C2. The reference setting unit is a unit that displays a specific image (viewpoint position specifying mark 128) on a predetermined display unit (symbol display device 61) during the acquisition period of the reference information (function of executing step S2206 in the main MPU 83). ). The gaming machine according to Feature C1,

  According to the feature C2, the specific image is displayed on the predetermined display unit during the reference information acquisition period. This makes it easier to acquire the player's reference information during the reference information acquisition period.

  Feature C3. The gaming machine according to the feature C1 or C2, wherein the reference information acquisition period occurs in a situation where a predetermined presentation (an intense heat system reach presentation) is performed on a predetermined display unit.

  According to the feature C3, when the predetermined effect is being executed, the player is highly likely to visually recognize the predetermined effect. Therefore, in the situation where the predetermined effect is being executed, the player's line-of-sight range is specified. In this case, it becomes easy to acquire reference information that becomes a reference. In addition, it is possible to acquire the reference information using a period during which the predetermined effect is being executed.

  Feature C4. The gaming machine according to Feature C3, wherein the predetermined effect is an effect in which a degree of expectation that profits are given to the player is higher than the specific effect.

  According to the feature C4, since the reference information acquisition period occurs in a situation where the player's attention level is high with respect to the predetermined display means, it is easy to acquire the reference information.

  Feature C5. Means for causing the predetermined effect to be executed in a situation where the reference information is not stored in the reference information storage means, or for increasing the frequency at which the predetermined effect is executed (the process of step S2807 in the sound light side MPU 93). A gaming machine according to the feature C3 or C4, which is provided with a function to be executed.

  According to the feature C5, since the predetermined effect is actively executed in a situation where the reference information is not acquired, it is possible to positively generate the reference information acquisition period.

Feature C6. A frequency improving means (function of executing the process of step S2903 in the light side MPU 93) for increasing the frequency at which the predetermined effect is executed in a situation where the reference information is not stored in the reference information storage means;
Frequency reduction means for reducing the frequency at which the predetermined effect is executed after the reference information is stored in the reference information storage means (function for executing the process of step S2911 in the sound light side MPU 93). When,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C5, comprising:

  According to the feature C6, since the execution frequency of the predetermined effect increases in a situation where the reference information is not acquired, it is possible to positively generate the reference information acquisition period. On the other hand, since the execution frequency of the predetermined effect is lower than before after the reference information is acquired, it is possible to prevent the state where the execution frequency of the predetermined effect is high from continuing.

  Feature C7. The frequency lowering means lowers the frequency at which the predetermined effect is executed after the predetermined effect is executed, even if the reference information is not stored in the reference information storage unit, than the frequency of execution until then. The gaming machine according to Feature C6, characterized by:

  According to the feature C7, it is possible to prevent the lengthening of the period in which the execution frequency of the predetermined effect is set high while actively generating the reference information acquisition period.

  Feature C8. The reference setting means includes the reference in a predetermined period during which the player's attention can be higher than a subsequent period in the execution period of the predetermined effect (a period of occurrence of a flashy effect in the intense heat reach effect). When the information is stored in the reference information storage means, the reference information is not newly acquired after the predetermined period of time, and the reference information is not acquired after the predetermined period. Is not stored in the reference information storage means, and if the state information corresponding to the reference is derived by the information deriving means after the elapse of the predetermined period, the state information is converted to the reference information. The gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C7, wherein information is stored in the reference information storage unit as information.

  According to the feature C8, when the reference information is acquired in a predetermined period in which the degree of attention of the player can be increased, the reference information is not newly acquired in the subsequent period. Thereby, it is possible to maintain a state in which more preferable reference information is acquired. On the other hand, when the reference information is not acquired in the predetermined period, the reference information is acquired in the subsequent period in the predetermined effect. Accordingly, it is possible to increase the possibility that the acquisition of the reference information is completed in a situation where the predetermined effect is being executed.

  Feature C9. In the predetermined period, when the reference information is derived by the information deriving unit, the reference setting unit derives the derived state even if the reference information is stored in the reference information storage unit. The gaming machine according to Feature C8, wherein information is stored in the reference information storage means as the reference information.

  According to the feature C9, since the reference information is repeatedly acquired in the predetermined period, it is possible to increase opportunities for acquiring more preferable reference information.

Feature C10. The effect setting means (the function of executing the point of interest type setting process in the main MPU 83 in the second embodiment, the function of executing the point of interest type setting process in the light side MPU 93 in the fourth embodiment)
Specified by the line-of-sight range specifying means (in the second embodiment, the function of executing the attention event specifying process in the main MPU 83, in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the point of interest type determination process in the sound light side MPU 93). Type setting means for setting an attention type to be applied from a plurality of types of attention types based on the line-of-sight range (in the second embodiment, a function for executing a point-of-interest type setting process in the main MPU 83, a fourth implementation) In the embodiment, a function of executing the point-of-interest type setting process in the sound light side MPU 93),
Aspect determining means (function for executing the process of step S606 in the sound light side MPU 93) that determines the execution aspect of the effect in an aspect corresponding to the attention type set by the type setting means;
With
Even if the reference information is stored in the reference information storage means in the middle of the predetermined effect, the type setting unit sets the attention type to be applied based on the line-of-sight range until the predetermined effect ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C9, wherein the processing for performing the processing is not executed.

  When the acquisition of the reference information is completed in the middle of the predetermined performance, if the process for setting the attention type to be applied based on the line-of-sight range is executed from the middle of the predetermined performance, the predetermined performance is the player. Since it is an effect that is easily noticed, it is considered that the player pays attention to the predetermined effect regardless of the type of the player, and as a result, there is a possibility that the attention type cannot be set appropriately. On the other hand, according to the feature C10, even if the acquisition of the reference information is completed in the middle of the predetermined effect, a process for setting the attention type to be applied based on the line-of-sight range is executed until the predetermined effect is completed. By not being performed, it becomes possible to appropriately set the attention type.

  Feature C11. If the reference information is not stored in the reference information storage means during the reference information acquisition period, the effect setting means does not affect the contents of the effect that is subsequently executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, wherein:

According to the feature C11, when the reference information is not acquired, the effect is not executed in a mode corresponding to the result of specifying the line-of-sight range. It is possible to prevent the performance from being executed in a manner corresponding to the range specifying result.
According to each feature of the feature C group, the following problems can be solved.
As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.
Specifically, for a pachinko machine, for example, a lottery is performed based on a game ball entering a ball-entry unit provided in a game area, and a variation display of a pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device. In the case where a winning result is obtained, a combination of a specific pattern or the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and a configuration for shifting to a special gaming state advantageous to the player is known. When the special game state is entered, for example, the opening / closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device. ing.
Here, in a gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to suitably produce an effect in order to increase the degree of attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  61 ... Symbol display device, 73 ... Imaging device, 78 ... Signal processing circuit, 83 ... Main side MPU, 85 ... Main side RAM, 85d ... Reference visible image storage area, 85e ... Reference distance data storage area, 93 ... Sound light side MPU, 94... Sound side ROM, 95. Sound side RAM, 95 a. Visible image storage area, 95 b. Distance data storage area, 128.

Claims (1)

Information deriving means capable of deriving state information of a monitoring range existing ahead of the gaming machine based on a reception result in the receiving unit;
Reference setting means for storing the state information derived by the information deriving means as reference information in the reference information storage means in a reference information acquisition period that becomes a reference when specifying the player's viewing range;
A viewing range identifying unit that identifies the viewing range that the player is viewing using the reference information stored in the reference information storage unit and the state information derived by the information deriving unit;
An effect setting unit that causes the result of specifying the visual range by the visual range specifying unit to affect the content of an effect that is subsequently executed.
Equipped with a,
The acquisition period of the reference information occurs in a situation where a predetermined effect is being executed on a predetermined display means,
When the reference information is stored in the reference information storage means in a predetermined period during which the player's attention can be higher than the subsequent period in the execution period of the predetermined effect, the reference setting means If the reference information is not newly acquired after the predetermined period has elapsed and the reference information is not stored in the reference information storage means during the predetermined period, A game machine characterized in that, when reference information state information is derived by the information deriving means after an elapse of the predetermined period, the state information is stored in the reference information storage means as the reference information. .

Images